SEMESTER 3

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

 SEMESTER S3
MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL SCIENCE AND PHYSICAL
SCIENCE – 3

(Common to B & C Groups)

Course Code GYMAT301 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Basic knowledge in
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
complex numbers.
Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the concept and applications of Fourier transforms in various engineering fields.
2. To introduce the basic theory of functions of a complex variable, including residue integration
and conformal transformation, and their applications
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fourier Integral, From Fourier series to Fourier Integral, Fourier Cosine and
Sine integrals, Fourier Cosine and Sine Transform, Linearity, Transforms of
1 Derivatives, Fourier Transform and its inverse, Linearity, Transforms of 9
Derivative.
(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 11.7, 11.8, 11.9)
Complex Function, Limit, Continuity, Derivative, Analytic functions,
Cauchy-Riemann Equations (without proof), Laplace’s Equations, Harmonic
2 functions, Finding harmonic conjugate, Conformal mapping, Mappings of 9
w= 𝑧 , 𝑤=𝑒 , w= , 𝑤= 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑧 .

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 13.3, 13.4, 17.1, 17.2, 17.4)
Complex Integration: Line integrals in the complex plane (Definition & Basic
properties), First evaluation method, Second evaluation method, Cauchy’s
integral theorem (without proof) on simply connected domain, Independence
3 9
of path, Cauchy integral theorem on multiply connected domain (without
proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof).
(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 14.1, 14.2, 14.3)
 Taylor series and Maclaurin series, Laurent series (without proof),
Singularities and Zeros – Isolated Singularity, Poles, Essential Singularities,
Removable singularities, Zeros of Analytic functions – Poles and Zeros,
4 9
Formulas for Residues, Residue theorem (without proof), Residue
Integration- Integral of Rational Functions of cosθ and sinθ.
(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 15.4, 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered. 60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve

CO1 K3
problems arising in engineering.
Understand the analyticity of complex functions and apply it in
CO2 K3
conformal mapping.
Compute complex integrals using Cauchy's integral theorem and
CO3 K3
Cauchy's integral formula.
Understand the series expansion of complex function about a
CO4 K3
singularity and apply residue theorem to compute real integrals.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and
Year
1 Advanced Engineering John Wiley & Sons 10th edition,
Erwin Kreyszig
Mathematics 2016
 Reference Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the
and
Publisher
Year
1 Dennis G. Zill, Patrick D. 3rd edition,
Complex Analysis Jones & Bartlett
Shanahan 2015
2 Higher Engineering McGraw-Hill 39th edition,
B. V. Ramana
Mathematics Education 2023

Higher Engineering Mathematics 44th

3 B.S. Grewal Khanna Publishers edition,
2018
st
4 Fast Fourier Transform - K.R. Rao, Do Nyeon 1 edition,
Springer
Algorithms and Applications Kim, Jae Jeong Hwang 2011
 SEMESTER S3

SOLID STATE DEVICES

Course Code PCECT302 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Mins

Prerequisites (if any) Physics of Electrical Course Type Theory

Science (GBPHT121)
Course Objectives:

1. This course explains the physical processes and working principles of semiconductor devices,
while relating the device performance to material parameters and design criteria.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review of Semiconductor physics: Equilibrium and steady state conditions,
Concept of effective mass and Fermi level, Density of states & Effective
density of states, Equilibrium concentration of electrons and holes. Excess
carriers in semiconductors: Generation and recombination mechanisms of
excess carriers, quasi-Fermi levels. Carrier transport in semiconductors:
1
Drift, conductivity and mobility, variation of mobility with temperature and
13
doping, Hall Effect. Diffusion, Einstein relations, Poisson equations,
Continuity equations, Current flow equations, Diffusion length, Gradient of
quasi-Fermi level.

PN junctions: Contact potential, Electrical Field, Potential and Charge

distribution at the junction, Biasing and Energy band diagrams, Ideal diode
equation. Bipolar junction transistor: Transistor action, Base width
2
modulation, Current components in a BJT, Derivation of current
12
components.

Metal Semiconductor contacts: Electron affinity and work function,

Ohmic and Rectifying Contacts, current voltage characteristics. Ideal MOS
3 11
capacitor: band diagrams at equilibrium, accumulation, depletion and
inversion, surface potential, CV characteristics, effects of real surfaces,
 threshold voltage, body effect. MOSFET- Drain current equation of
enhancement type MOSFET (derivation)- linear and saturation region,
Drain characteristics, transfer characteristics.

MOSFET scaling: Need for scaling, constant voltage scaling and constant
field scaling. Sub- threshold conduction in MOS. Short channel effects in
MOSFETs: Channel length modulation, Drain Induced Barrier Lowering,
4 Velocity Saturation, Threshold Voltage Variations and Hot Carrier Effects. 8
MESFET and FinFET: Structure, operation and advantages.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply Fermi-Dirac statistics to compare equilibrium carrier K3
CO1
concentration.
State different carrier transport mechanisms in extrinsic K3
CO2
semiconductors and obtain the current densities due to this transport.
Apply the concept of semiconductor physics to solve the current K3
CO3
components in semiconductor devices.
Analyze the response of semiconductor devices for different biasing K3
CO4
conditions

CO5 Outline the effects of scaling in semiconductor devices. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3

CO2 3 2

CO3 3 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Publisher and Year
Semiconductor device
1
Fundamentals Robert Pierret Pearson Education 1/e, 1996

2 Physics of Semiconductor
Devices Michael shur Pearson Education 1/e, 2019

3 Semiconductor Physics and

Devices, 3ed, An Indian S.M. Sze, M.K. Lee Wiley 3/e, 2021
Adaptation
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Semiconductor Physics and Neamen McGraw Hill 4/e, 2017
Devices
2 Physics of Semiconductor Sze S.M John Wiley 3/e, 2015
Devices
3 Semiconductor Devices: Sze S.M John Wiley 3/e, 2016
Physics and Technology
4 Operation and Modelling of the Yannis Tsividis Oxford University 3/e,2010
MOS Transistor Press
5 Semiconductor Physics and Sze S.M., M.K. Lee, An Indian Adaptation 3ed, 2021
Devices, ,
6 Fundamentals of Semiconductor Achuthan, K N Bhat, McGraw Hill 1e,2015
Devices,

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106091
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106091
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106091

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106091
 SEMESTER S3

ANALOG CIRCUITS

Course Code PCECT303 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

BEE/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(GYEST104)
Course Objectives:

1. To introduce and verify basic principles, operation and applications of the various analog electronic
circuits and devices
2. To understand and analyze the design and working of amplifiers and their configurations.

SYLLABUS
Module Syllabus Description Contact
No. Hours
Wave Shaping Circuits: RC differentiating and integrating circuits, Analysis
of First order RC low pass and high pass filter for step input -rise time, band
1
width. Diode Clipping and clamping circuits. 10
BJT/MOSFET Biasing: Need for biasing, DC load line, operating point, BJT
biasing (CE configuration)– fixed bias & voltage divider bias (Design &
analysis). MOSFET biasing,
BJT Amplifiers: Design of RC coupled CE amplifier - Small signal analysis of
CE amplifier using hybrid- π model (low and mid frequency`). The high-
frequency hybrid-π model of BJT, Miller effect, High frequency response

f
of single stage CE amplifier, short circuit current gain, cut-off frequency β
2
& unity gain bandwidth fT .
12
MOSFET Amplifiers: Design of CS amplifier, Small signal analysis using

hybrid- π model (mid frequency only), Small signal voltage gain, input & output
impedance, CS stage with current source load and diode connected load.
Multistage BJT Amplifiers: Types of multistage amplifiers, Effect of
cascading on gain and bandwidth.
 Small signal voltage gain, input & output impedance of BJT cascode amplifier
using hybrid-π model.
Feedback amplifiers: The general feedback structure, Effect of negative
3 feedback on gain, bandwidth, noise reduction and distortion. The four basic 11
feedback topologies, Analysis of discrete BJT circuits in voltage-series and
voltage-shunt feedback topologies - voltage gain, input and output impedance.
Oscillators: Classification, criterion for oscillation, Wien bridge oscillator,
Hartley and Crystal oscillator. (working principle and design equations of the
circuits; analysis of Wien bridge oscillator only required).
Power amplifiers: Classification, Transformer coupled class A power amplifier,
push pull class B and class AB power amplifiers, complementary- symmetry
class B and Class AB
4
power amplifiers, class C and D power amplifier - efficiency and distortion (no 11
analysis required)
Linear Voltage Regulators: Types of voltage regulators- series and shunt -
working and design, load & line regulation, short circuit protection and fold back
protection.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Design wave shaping circuits using first order RC network and diodes. K3
Analyze single stage and multistage BJT amplifier circuits using K3
CO2
equivalent models.

CO3 Apply the principles of feedback in the design of oscillators. K3

CO4 Design power amplifiers and voltage regulator circuits. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 `2 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Publisher and Year
11th
1 Electronic Devices and Circuit Robert Boylestad and L Pearson edition,
Theory. Nashelsky 2015

Sedra A. S. and K. C. Oxford University 6th edition,

2 Microelectronic Circuits
Smith, Press, 2013 2013
Theodore F. Bogart;
3 Electronic Circuits and Devices Beasley, Jeffrey S.; Pearson Education 6th edition
Guillermo Rico India

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of 2nd edition,
1 Razavi B. Wiley
Microelectronics 2015
Oxford University 5th edition,
2 Electronic Devices and Circuits David A Bell
Press 2008
Electronic Circuits Analysis 1st edition,
3 D. Meganathan Yes Dee Publishing
and Design 1 2023
Analysis and Design of 1st edition,
4 K. Gopakumar OWL Books
Electronic Circuits 2023

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106188/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106188/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106188/
 SEMESTER S3

LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN

Course Code PBECT304 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

GYEST104
Introduction to Electrical &
Prerequisites (if any) Electronics Engineering Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the number systems in digital systems

2. To introduce the basic postulates of Boolean algebra, digital logic gates and Boolean
expressions
3. To design and implement combinational and sequential circuits.
4. To design and implement digital circuits using Hardware Descriptive Language like Verilog
on FPGA
SYLLABUS
Module Syllabus Description Contact
No. Hours
Introduction to digital circuits: Review of number systems representation-
conversions, Arithmetic of Binary number systems, Signed and unsigned
1 numbers, BCD. 9
Boolean algebra: Theorems, sum of product and product of sum -
simplification, canonical forms- min term and max term, Simplification of
Boolean expressions - Karnaugh map (upto 4 variables), Implementation of
Boolean expressions using universal gates.
Combinational logic circuits- Half adder and Full adders, Subtractors, BCD
adder, Ripple carry and carry look ahead adders, Decoders, Encoders, Code
2
converters, Comparators, Parity generator, Multiplexers, De-multiplexers, 9
Implementation of Boolean algebra using MUX.
Introduction to Verilog HDL – Basic language elements, Basic implementation
of logic gates and combinational circuits.
 Sequential Circuits: SR Latch, Flip flops - SR, JK, Master-Slave JK, D and
3 T Flip flops. Conversion of Flip flops, Excitation table and characteristic
9
equation. Shift registers-SIPO, SISO, PISO, PIPO and Universal shift
registers. Ring and Johnsons counters. Design of Asynchronous, Synchronous
and Mod N counters.
4 Finite state machines - Mealy and Moore models, State graphs, State
9
assignment, State table, State reduction.
Logic Families: -Electrical characteristics of logic gates (Noise margin, Fan-
in, Fan-out, Propagation delay, Transition time, Power -delay product) -TTL,
ECL, CMOS.
Circuit description and working of TTL and CMOS inverter, CMOS NAND
and CMOS NOR gates.

Suggestion on Project Topics

● A random sequence generator

● Traffic light controller

● Multiplexer based person priority check in system at airport

● Waveform generator

● Object/Visitor counter

● Fast adders

● Hamming code-based parity checker

● Arithmetic Logic Unit using FPGA

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Attendance Project Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
(Written) (Written )

5 30 12.5 12.5 60
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from  Each question carries 6 marks.
each module.  Two questions will be given from each module,
 Total of 8 Questions, out of which 1 question should be answered. 40
each carrying 2 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 2
sub divisions.
(8x2 =16marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the knowledge of digital representation of information and
CO1
Boolean algebra to deduce optimal digital circuits. K3
Design and implement combinational logic circuits, sequential logic K5
CO2
circuits and finite state machines.
Design and implement digital circuits on FPGA using hardware K5
CO3
description language (HDL).
Outline the performance of logic families with K2
CO4
Respect to different parameters.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Publisher and Year
11th
Digital Fundamentals Edition,
1 Thomas L. Floyd Pearson Education
2017

Fundamentals of Digital Logic McGraw Hill

2 Stephen Brown 2nd Edition
with Verilog Design Education

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Design: With an
1 Introduction to the Verilog M Morris Mano, Michael Pearson India 6th Edition,
HDL, VHDL, and System D. Ciletti 2018
Verilog
Fundamentals of Digital 4th Edition,
2 A. Ananthakumar PHI
Circuits 2016
Introduction to Logic Circuits 2nd Edition,
3 Brock J. LaMeres Springer
& Logic Design with Verilog 2019
Digital Design Verilog HDL 1st Edition,
4 Joseph Cavanagh CRC Press
and Fundamentals 2008
5 Digital Circuits and Systems D.V. Hall Tata McGraw Hill 1989

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105185/

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105185/

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105185/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105185/
 PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/ Presentation
Project Laboratory
Lecture delivery (Progress and Final
identification Work/
Workshops Presentations)
Group discussion Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
Question answer Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking Feedback,
Testing
Brainstorming and self-learning Project reformation (If
Sessions required)
Poster Presentation / Video
Guest Speakers Case Study/ Field Presentation: Students present
Prototyping
(Industry Experts) Survey Report their results in a 2 to 5 minutes
video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Allotted
Sl. No Evaluation for
Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer Sessions 4
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3

Total 30

Project Assessment and Evaluation criteria (30 Marks)

1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

 Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

 Research and background understanding
 Defined objectives and methodology
2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

 Individual contribution to the presentation

 Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

 Active participation and individual contribution

 Teamwork and collaboration
4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

 Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

 Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
 Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

 Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

 Individual contribution to the presentation
 Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

 Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

 Innovation and originality in the project
 Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S3

INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND DATA

SCIENCE

Course Code GNEST305 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Demonstrate a solid understanding of advanced linear algebra concepts, machine learning

algorithms and statistical analysis techniques relevant to engineering applications, principles and
algorithms.
2. Apply theoretical concepts to solve practical engineering problems, analyze data to extract
meaningful insights, and implement appropriate mathematical and computational techniques for
AI and data science applications.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to AI and Machine Learning: Basics of Machine Learning -
types of Machine Learning systems-challenges in ML- Supervised learning
1
model example- regression models- Classification model example- Logistic
regression-unsupervised model example- K-means clustering. Artificial 11
Neural Network- Perceptron- Universal Approximation Theorem (statement
only)- Multi-Layer Perceptron- Deep Neural Network- demonstration of
regression and classification problems using MLP.(Text-2)

2 Mathematical Foundations of AI and Data science: Role of linear algebra

in Data representation and analysis – Matrix decomposition- Singular Value 11

Decomposition (SVD)- Spectral decomposition- Dimensionality reduction

technique-Principal Component Analysis (PCA). (Text-1)
 Applied Probability and Statistics for AI and Data Science: Basics of
probability-random variables and statistical measures - rules in probability-
3
Bayes theorem and its applications- statistical estimation-Maximum 11
Likelihood Estimator (MLE) - statistical summaries- Correlation analysis-
linear correlation (direct problems only)- regression analysis- linear regression
(using least square method) (Text book 4 )
Basics of Data Science: Benefits of data science-use of statistics and
Machine Learning in Data Science- data science process - applications of
4
Machine Learning in Data Science- modelling process- demonstration of ML
11
applications in data science- Big Data and Data Science. (For visualization
the software tools like Tableau, PowerBI, R or Python can be used. For
Machine Learning implementation, Python, MATLAB or R can be
used.)(Text book-5)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from  Each question carries 9 marks.
each module.  Two questions will be given from each module,
 Total of 8 Questions, out of which 1 question should be answered. 60
each carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3
sub divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Apply the concept of machine learning algorithms including neural K3

CO1
networks and supervised/unsupervised learning techniques for
engineering applications.
Apply advanced mathematical concepts such as matrix operations, K3
CO2
singular values, and principal component analysis to analyze and solve
engineering problems.
Analyze and interpret data using statistical methods including K3
CO3
descriptive statistics, correlation, and regression analysis to derive
meaningful insights and make informed decisions.
Integrate statistical approaches and machine learning techniques to K3
CO4
ensure practically feasible solutions in engineering contexts.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3
 Text Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Name of the
and
Author/s Publisher
Year
Wellesley- 6th edition,
1 Introduction to Linear Algebra Gilbert Strang
Cambridge 2023
Press
Hands-on machine learning with 2nd
2 Aurélien Géron O'Reilly Media, Inc.
Scikit-Learn, Keras, and edition,202
TensorFlow 2
Deisenroth, Marc
Mathematics for machine learning Cambridge 1st edition.
3 Peter,
A. Aldo Faisal, and University 2020
Cheng Soon Ong Press
Fundamentals of mathematical Gupta, S. C., and V. 9th edition,
4 Sultan Chand & Sons
statistics K. 2020
Kapoor
Introducing data science: big Cielen, Davy, and 1st
5 data, machine learning, and Simon and Schuster
Arno Meysman edition
more, using Python tools
, 2016

Reference Books

Kotu,
Data science: concepts and Vijay, and
1 practice
Morgan Kaufmann 2nd edition, 2018
Bala
Deshpande
Probability and Statistics for Carlos Center for Data
2 Fernandez- Science in NYU
1st edition, 2017
Data Science
Granda
Avrim
Blum, John Cambridge University
3 Foundations of Data Science Hopcroft, Press
1st edition, 2020
and Ravi
Kannan
James D.
4 Statistics For Data Science Packt Publishing 1st edition, 2019
Miller
Michael J.
Probability and Statistics - The Evans and
5 University of Toronto 1st edition, 2009
Science of Uncertainty Jeffrey S.
Rosenthal
chrome-
An Introduction to the extension://efaidnbmn
Joseph C. Preliminary
6 Science of Statistics: From nnibpcajpcglclefindm
Edition.
Watkins kaj/https://www.math.
Theory to Implementation
arizo
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/18-06-linear-algebra-spring-2010/resources/lecture-29-singular-
2 value-decomposition/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/18-650-statistics-for-applications-fall-2016/resources/lecture-19-
3
video/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/
 SEMESTER S3

ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Code UCHUT346 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding of finance and costing for engineering operation, budgetary planning and
control
2. Provide fundamental concept of micro and macroeconomics related to engineering industry
3. Deliver the basic concepts of Value Engineering.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Basic Economics Concepts - Basic economic problems – Production

1 Possibility Curve – Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Law of

Demand - Law of supply – Elasticity - measurement of elasticity and its 6
applications – Equilibrium- Changes in demand and supply and its effects

Production function - Law of variable proportion – Economies of Scale –

Internal and External Economies – Cobb-Douglas Production Function

2 Cost concepts – Social cost, private cost – Explicit and implicit cost – Sunk 6
cost - Opportunity cost - short run cost curves - Revenue concepts

Firms and their objectives – Types of firms – Markets - Perfect Competition

– Monopoly - Monopolistic Competition - Oligopoly (features and
equilibrium of a firm)
 Monetary System – Money – Functions - Central Banking –Inflation - Causes
and Effects – Measures to Control Inflation - Monetary and Fiscal policies –
3 Deflation
6
Taxation – Direct and Indirect taxes (merits and demerits) - GST

National income – Concepts - Circular Flow – Methods of Estimation and

Difficulties - Stock Market – Functions- Problems faced by the Indian stock
market-Demat Account and Trading Account – Stock market Indicators-
SENSEX and NIFTY
Value Analysis and value Engineering - Cost Value, Exchange Value, Use
4 Value, Esteem Value - Aims, Advantages and Application areas of Value 6
Engineering - Value Engineering Procedure - Break-even Analysis - Cost-
Benefit Analysis - Capital Budgeting - Process planning

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Case
(Written) (Written )
study/Micropr
oject
10 15 12.5 12.5 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 Minimum 1 and  2 questions will be given from each module, out
Maximum 2 Questions of which 1 question should be answered.
from each module.  Each question can have a maximum of 2 sub
50
 Total of 6 Questions, divisions.
each carrying 3 marks  Each question carries 8 marks.
(6x3 =18marks)
(4x8 = 32 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the fundamentals of various economic issues using laws K2
CO1
and learn the concepts of demand, supply, elasticity and production
function.
Develop decision making capability by applying concepts relating to K3
CO2
costs and revenue, and acquire knowledge regarding the functioning of
firms in different market situations.
Outline the macroeconomic principles of monetary and fiscal systems, K2
CO3
national income and stock market.
Make use of the possibilities of value analysis and engineering, and K3
CO4
solve simple business problems using break even analysis, cost benefit
analysis and capital budgeting techniques.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 -

CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - 1 -

CO3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -

CO4 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 -

Text Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Name of the
and
Author/s Publisher
Year
Geetika, Piyali Ghosh
1 Managerial Economics Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
and Chodhury

H. G. Thuesen, W. J.
2 PHI 1966
Engineering Economy Fabrycky

3 R. Paneerselvam PHI 2012

Engineering Economics
 Reference Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Name of the
and
Author/s Publisher
Year
Leland Blank P.E,
1 Mc Graw Hill 7TH Edition
Engineering Economy Anthony Tarquin P.
E.
2 Indian Financial System Khan M. Y. Tata McGraw Hill 2011

Engineering Economics and Donald G. Newman,

3 Engg. Press, Texas 2002
analysis Jerome P. Lavelle

Contemporary Prentice Hall of

4 Chan S. Park 2001
Engineering Economics India Ltd
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Course Code UCHUT347 CIE Marks 50

2:0:0:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:
1. Equip with the knowledge and skills to make ethical decisions and implement gender-sensitive
practices in their professional lives.
2. Develop a holistic and comprehensive interdisciplinary approach to understanding engineering
ethics principles from a perspective of environment protection and sustainable development.
3. Develop the ability to find strategies for implementing sustainable engineering solutions.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of ethics - Personal vs. professional ethics, Civic Virtue,
Respect for others, Profession and Professionalism, Ingenuity, diligence
and responsibility, Integrity in design, development, and research domains,
Plagiarism, a balanced outlook on law - challenges - case studies,
Technology and digital revolution-Data, information, and knowledge,
Cybertrust and cybersecurity, Data collection & management, High
technologies: connecting people and places-accessibility and social
impacts, Managing conflict, Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role of
1 confidentiality in moral integrity, Codes of Ethics.
6
Basic concepts in Gender Studies - sex, gender, sexuality, gender spectrum:
beyond the binary, gender identity, gender expression, gender stereotypes,
Gender disparity and discrimination in education, employment and
everyday life, History of women in Science & Technology, Gendered
technologies & innovations, Ethical values and practices in connection with
gender - equity, diversity & gender justice, Gender policy and
women/transgender empowerment initiatives.
Introduction to Environmental Ethics: Definition, importance and
historical development of environmental ethics, key philosophical theories
(anthropocentrism, biocentrism, ecocentrism). Sustainable Engineering
Principles: Definition and scope, triple bottom line (economic, social and
2 environmental sustainability), life cycle analysis and sustainability metrics. 6
Ecosystems and Biodiversity: Basics of ecosystems and their functions,
Importance of biodiversity and its conservation, Human impact on ecosystems
and biodiversity loss, An overview of various ecosystems in Kerala/India, and
its significance. Landscape and Urban Ecology: Principles of landscape
 ecology, Urbanization and its environmental impact, Sustainable urban
planning and green infrastructure.
Hydrology and Water Management: Basics of hydrology and water cycle,
Water scarcity and pollution issues, Sustainable water management practices,
Environmental flow, disruptions and disasters. Zero Waste Concepts and
Practices: Definition of zero waste and its principles, Strategies for waste
reduction, reuse, reduce and recycling, Case studies of successful zero waste
initiatives. Circular Economy and Degrowth: Introduction to the circular
3 economy model, Differences between linear and circular economies, degrowth 6
principles, Strategies for implementing circular economy practices and
degrowth principles in engineering. Mobility and Sustainable
Transportation: Impacts of transportation on the environment and climate,
Basic tenets of a Sustainable Transportation design, Sustainable urban
mobility solutions, Integrated mobility systems, E-Mobility, Existing and
upcoming models of sustainable mobility solutions.
Renewable Energy and Sustainable Technologies: Overview of renewable
energy sources (solar, wind, hydro, biomass), Sustainable technologies in
energy production and consumption, Challenges and opportunities in
renewable energy adoption. Climate Change and Engineering Solutions:
Basics of climate change science, Impact of climate change on natural and
human systems, Kerala/India and the Climate crisis, Engineering solutions to
mitigate, adapt and build resilience to climate change. Environmental
4 Policies and Regulations: Overview of key environmental policies and
6
regulations (national and international), Role of engineers in policy
implementation and compliance, Ethical considerations in environmental
policy-making. Case Studies and Future Directions: Analysis of real-world
case studies, Emerging trends and future directions in environmental ethics
and sustainability, Discussion on the role of engineers in promoting a
sustainable future.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Continuous internal evaluation will be based on individual and group activities undertaken throughout
the course and the portfolio created documenting their work and learning. The portfolio will include
reflections, project reports, case studies, and all other relevant materials.
 The students should be grouped into groups of size 4 to 6 at the beginning of the semester. These
groups can be the same ones they have formed in the previous semester.
 Activities are to be distributed between 2 class hours and 3 Self-study hours.
 The portfolio and reflective journal should be carried forward and displayed during the 7th Semester
Seminar course as a part of the experience sharing regarding the skills developed through various
courses.
Sl. Item Particulars Group/I Marks
No. ndividua
l (G/I)
1 Reflective Weekly entries reflecting on what was learned, personal I 5
Journal insights, and how it can be applied to local contexts.
2 Micro project 1 a) Perform an Engineering Ethics Case Study analysis and G 8
prepare a report
(Detailed 1 b) Conduct a literature survey on ‘Code of Ethics for
documentation of Engineers’ and prepare a sample code of ethics
the project, 2. Listen to a TED talk on a Gender-related topic, do a literature G 5
including survey on that topic and make a report citing the relevant
methodologies, papers with a specific analysis of the Kerala context
findings, and 3. Undertake a project study based on the concepts of G 12
reflections) sustainable development* - Module II, Module III & Module
IV
3 Activities 2. One activity* each from Module II, Module III & Module IV G 15
4 Final A comprehensive presentation summarising the key takeaways G 5
Presentation from the course, personal reflections, and proposed future
actions based on the learnings.
Total Marks 50

*Can be taken from the given sample activities/projects

Evaluation Criteria:
● Depth of Analysis: Quality and depth of reflections and analysis in project reports and case
studies.
● Application of Concepts: Ability to apply course concepts to real-world problems and
local contexts.
● Creativity: Innovative approaches and creative solutions proposed in projects and reflections.
● Presentation Skills: Clarity, coherence, and professionalism in the final presentation.
Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:
Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop the ability to apply the principles of engineering ethics in their K3
CO1
professional life.
Develop the ability to exercise gender-sensitive practices in their K4
CO2
professional lives
Develop the ability to explore contemporary environmental issues and K5
CO3
sustainable practices.
Develop the ability to analyse the role of engineers in promoting K4
CO4
sustainability and climate resilience.
Develop interest and skills in addressing pertinent environmental and K3
CO5
climate-related challenges through a sustainable engineering approach.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO2 1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO4 1 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2

Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
2nd edition
Ethics in Engineering Practice Cambridge University
1 Caroline Whitbeck & August
and Research Press & Assessment
2011
Virtue Ethics and
Cambridge University November
2 Professional Justin Oakley
Press & Assessment 2006
Roles
2nd edition
Sustainability Cambridge University &
3 Bert J. M. de Vries
Science Press & Assessment December
2023
Sustainable Engineering
Cambridge University
4 Principles and Bhavik R. Bakshi, 2019
Press & Assessmen
Practice
M Govindarajan, S
Engineering PHI Learning Private
5 Natarajan and V S 2012
Ethics Ltd, New Delhi
Senthil Kumar
Professional
New age international
6 ethics and human RS Naagarazan 2006.
(P) limited New Delhi
values
Tata McGraw Hill
Ethics in Mike W Martin and 4" edition,
Publishing Company
Engineering Roland Schinzinger, 2014
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi

Suggested Activities/Projects:
Module-II
● Write a reflection on a local environmental issue (e.g., plastic waste in Kerala backwaters
or oceans) from different ethical perspectives (anthropocentric, biocentric, ecocentric).
● Write a life cycle analysis report of a common product used in Kerala (e.g., a coconut, bamboo
or rubber-based product) and present findings on its sustainability.
● Create a sustainability report for a local business, assessing its environmental, social, and
economic impacts
● Presentation on biodiversity in a nearby area (e.g., a local park, a wetland, mangroves, college
campus etc) and propose conservation strategies to protect it.
● Develop a conservation plan for an endangered species found in Kerala.
 ● Analyze the green spaces in a local urban area and propose a plan to enhance urban
ecology using native plants and sustainable design.
● Create a model of a sustainable urban landscape for a chosen locality in Kerala.

Module-III
● Study a local water body (e.g., a river or lake) for signs of pollution or natural flow disruption and
suggest sustainable management and restoration practices.
● Analyse the effectiveness of water management in the college campus and propose improvements -
calculate the water footprint, how to reduce the footprint, how to increase supply through rainwater
harvesting, and how to decrease the supply-demand ratio
● Implement a zero waste initiative on the college campus for one week and document the challenges
and outcomes.
● Develop a waste audit report for the campus. Suggest a plan for a zero-waste approach.
● Create a circular economy model for a common product used in Kerala (e.g., coconut oil, cloth etc).
● Design a product or service based on circular economy and degrowth principles and present a business
plan.
● Develop a plan to improve pedestrian and cycling infrastructure in a chosen locality in Kerala

Module-IV
● Evaluate the potential for installing solar panels on the college campus including cost-benefit analysis
and feasibility study.
● Analyse the energy consumption patterns of the college campus and propose sustainable alternatives to
reduce consumption - What gadgets are being used? How can we reduce demand using energy-saving
gadgets?
● Analyse a local infrastructure project for its climate resilience and suggest improvements.
● Analyse a specific environmental regulation in India (e.g., Coastal Regulation Zone) and its impact on
local communities and ecosystems.
● Research and present a case study of a successful sustainable engineering project in Kerala/India (e.g.,
sustainable building design, water management project, infrastructure project).
● Research and present a case study of an unsustainable engineering project in Kerala/India highlighting
design and implementation faults and possible corrections/alternatives (e.g., a housing complex with
water logging, a water management project causing frequent floods, infrastructure project that affects
surrounding landscapes or ecosystems).
 SEMESTER S3
ANALOG CIRCUITS LAB

Course Code PCECL307 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week ESE Marks

0:0:3:0 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. Familiarise the students with the analog circuits design using discrete components.
2. Familiarise the students with simulation of basic analog circuits

Expt. Experiments
No.

Part A – List of Experiments using discrete components (Any Six experiments mandatory)

1 RC Integrating and Differentiating Circuits – (Transient analysis with different inputs and
frequency response)
2 Diode Clipping and Clamping Circuits (Transient and transfer characteristics)
3 CE amplifier – Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency response characteristics
4 CS MOSFET amplifier - Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency response
characteristics
5 Cascaded amplifier (CE – CE) - Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency
response characteristics
6 Cascode amplifier - Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency response
characteristics
7 Feedback amplifiers (current series & voltage series) - Design for a specific voltage gain and
plot frequency response characteristics
8 RC oscillators – RC phase shift or wien bridge oscillator
9 Power amplifiers (Transformer less) – Class B & Class AB
10 Transistor series voltage regulator – Design for a specific output voltage with & without short
circuit protection (plot load & line regulation characteristics).
Part B – Simulation Experiments (Any Six experiments mandatory)

The experiments shall be conducted using Open-Source Tools such as QUCS, KiCad, LT SPICE, or
variants of SPICE tools.
1 RC Integrating and Differentiating Circuits – (Transient analysis with different inputs and
frequency response)
2 Diode Clipping and Clamping Circuits (Transient and transfer characteristics)
3 CE amplifier – Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency response characteristics
4 CS MOSFET amplifier - Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency response
characteristics
5 Cascaded amplifier (CE – CE) - Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency
response characteristics
6 Cascode amplifier - Design for a specific voltage gain and plot frequency response
characteristics
7 Feedback amplifiers (current series & voltage series) - Design for a specific voltage gain and
plot frequency response characteristics
8 RC oscillators – RC phase shift or wien bridge oscillator
9 Power amplifiers (Transformer less) – Class B & Class AB
10 Transistor series voltage regulator – Design for a specific output voltage with & without short
circuit protection (plot load & line regulation characteristics).

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only
upon submitting the duly certified record.

 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Design and demonstrate the functioning of basic analog circuits using
CO1 K3
discrete components.
Design and simulate the functioning of basic analog circuits using simulation
CO2 K3
tools

CO3 Conduct troubleshooting of a given circuit and to analyze it K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 2 3 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Oxford University
Electronic Devices and Circuits David A Bell 5th edition
Press, 2008
2 Electronic Circuits Analysis Yes Dee Publishing,
D. Meganathan 1st edition
and Design 1 2023

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate

execution of experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in
observations, and troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough
record and maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.
 Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the

procedure and understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and
organizing materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related
to the experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or
quality of program output.

3. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

4. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S3
LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGN LABORATORY

Course Code PCECL308 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week ESE Marks

0:0:3:0 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. Familiarise the students with the Digital Logic Design through the implementation of
Logic Circuits.

2. Familiarise the students with the HDL based Digital Design and FPGA boards

Expt. Experiments
No.

Part A – List of Experiments using digital components (Any Six experiments mandatory)

1 Realization of functions using basic and universal gates (SOP and POS forms).

2 Design and Realization of half/full adder and subtractor using basic gates and universal gates.
3 4 bit adder/subtractor and BCD adder using 7483
4 Study of Flip Flops : S-R, D, T, JK and Master slave JK FF using NAND gates
5 Asynchronous Counter : 3 bit up/down counter, Realization of Mod N Counter
6 Synchronous Counter: Realization of 4-bit up/down counter, Realization of Mod-N counters
7 Ring counter and Johnson Counter.
8 Realization of counters using IC’s (7490, 7492, 7493).
9 Realization of combinational circuits using MUX & DEMUX, using ICs (74150, 74154)
10 Sequence Generator / Detector
Part B – Simulation Experiments (Any Six experiments mandatory)

The experiments shall be conducted using Verilog and implementation using small FPGA
Experiment 1: Realization of Logic Gates and Familiarization of FPGAs
1
 (a) Familiarization of a small FPGA board and its ports and interface.
(b) Create the .pcf files for your FPGA board.
(c) Familiarization of the basic syntax of verilog
Development of verilog modules for basic gates, synthesis and implementation in the above FPGA to
verify the truth tables.
(e) Verify the universality and non associativity of NAND and NOR gates by uploading the
corresponding verilog files to the FPGA boards.
Experiment 2: Adders in Verilog
2 (a) Development of verilog modules for half adder in any of the 3 modeling styles
(b) Development of verilog modules for full adder in structural modeling using half adder.
Experiment 3: Mux and Demux in Verilog
3 (a) Development of verilog modules for a 4x1 MUX.
(b) Development of verilog modules for a 1x4 DEMUX.
Experiment 4: Flipflops and counters
4 (a) Development of verilog modules for SR, JK and D flipflops.
(b) Development of verilog modules for a binary decade/Johnson/Ring counters
Experiment 5. Multiplexer and Logic Implementation in FPGA
5 (a) Make a gate level design of an 8 : 1 multiplexer, write to FPGA and test its functionality.
(b) Use the above module to realize any logic function
Experiment 6. Flip-Flops and their Conversion in FPGA
6 (a) Make gate level designs of J-K, J-K master-slave, T and D flip-flops, implement and test them
on the FPGA board.
(b) Implement and test the conversions such as T to D, D to T, J-K to T and J-K to D
Experiment 7: Asynchronous and Synchronous Counters in FPGA
(a) Make a design of a 4-bit up down ripple counter using T-flip-flops in the previous experiment,
7
implement and test them on the FPGA board.
(b) Make a design of a 4-bit up down synchronous counter using T-flip-lops in the previous
experiment, implement and test them on the FPGA board.
Experiment 8: Universal Shift Register in FPGA
8 (a) Make a design of a 4-bit universal shift register using D-flip-flops in the previous experiment,
implement and test them on the FPGA board.
(b) Implement ring and Johnson counters with it.
Experiment 9. BCD to Seven Segment Decoder in FPGA
(a) Make a gate level design of a seven segment decoder, write to FPGA and test its functionality.
9
(b) Test it with switches and seven segment display. Use ouput ports for connection to the display.
 Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination
only upon submitting the duly certified record.

 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Design and demonstrate the functioning of various combinational and
CO1 K3
sequential circuits using ICs
Apply an industry compatible hardware description language to implement
CO2 K3
digital circuits
Implement digital circuits on FPGA boards and connect external hardware to
CO3 K3
the boards
Function effectively as an individual and in a team to accomplish the given
CO4 K2
task.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 2 3 3
CO2 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Publisher and Year
1 Verilog HDL Synthesis: A B. S. Publications, 2001
J. Bhasker
Practical Primer
2 Jaico Publishers. V
Fundamentals of Logic Design Roth C.H 5th Edition
Ed., 2009

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Verilog HDL :A guide to

Palnitkar S. Prentice Hall; 2003. 2nd Edn.,
digital design and synthesis

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and
understanding of the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)
 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate
execution of experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in
observations, and troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.
 3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough
record and maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the

procedure and understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and
organizing materials/equipment.

 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related

to the experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or
quality of program output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted.

 SEMESTER 4
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S4

MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL SCIENCE – 4

Course Code GBMAT401 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Basic calculus Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize students with the foundations of probabilistic and statistical analysis mostly used
in varied applications in engineering and science.
2. To expose the students to the basics of random processes essential for their subsequent study
of analog and digital communication

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Random variables, Discrete random variables and their probability
distributions, Cumulative distribution function, Expectation, Mean and
variance, Binomial distribution, Poisson distribution, Poisson

1 distribution as a limit of the binomial distribution, Joint pmf of two 9

discrete random variables, Marginal pmf, Independent random
variables, Expected value of a function of two discrete variables.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 3.1 to 3.4, 3.6, 5.1, 5.2]
Continuous random variables and their probability distributions,
Cumulative distribution function, Expectation, Mean and variance,
Uniform, Normal and Exponential distributions, Joint pdf of two
2 9
Continuous random variables, Marginal pdf, Independent random
variables, Expectation value of a function of two continuous variables.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2]
Confidence Intervals, Confidence Level, Confidence Intervals and
3 9
One-side confidence intervals for a Population Mean for large and
 small samples (normal distribution and t-distribution), Hypotheses and
Test Procedures, Type I and Type II error, z Tests for Hypotheses about
a Population Mean (for large sample), t Test for Hypotheses about a
Population Mean (for small sample), Tests concerning a population
proportion for large and small samples.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4]
Random process concept, classification of process, Methods of
Description of Random process, Special classes, Average Values of
Random Process, Stationarity- SSS, WSS, Autocorrelation functions
4 9
and its properties, Ergodicity, Mean-Ergodic Process, Mean-Ergodic
Theorem, Correlation Ergodic Process, Distribution Ergodic Process.
[Text 2: Relevant topics from Chapter 6]

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module,
 Total of 8 Questions, out of which 1 question should be answered.
60
each carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Illustrate the concept, properties and important models of discrete
CO1 K3
random variables and to apply in suitable random phenomena.
Describe the concept, properties and important models of continuous
CO2 K3
random variables and to apply in suitable random phenomena.
Estimate population parameters, assess their certainty with confidence

CO3 intervals, and test hypotheses about population means and proportions K3
using z-tests and the one-sample t-test.
Analyze random processes by classifying them, describing their
CO4 properties, utilizing autocorrelation functions, and understanding their K3
applications in areas like signal processing and communication systems.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
9th edition,
Probability and Statistics for
1 Devore J. L Cengage Learning 2016
Engineering and the Sciences
Probability, Statistics and The McGraw-Hill 3rd edition,
2 T Veerarajan
Random Processes 2008
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Probability, Random Variables Papoulis, A. & Pillai, 4th edition,
1 McGraw Hill.
and Stochastic Processes, S.U., 2002
Introduction to Probability and
6th edition,
2 Statistics for Engineers and Ross, S. M. Academic Press
2020
Scientists
Probability and Random PHI Learning Private 3rd edition,
3 Palaniammal, S.
Processes Limited 2015
David F. Anderson, 1st edition,
4 Introduction to Probability Cambridge
Timo, Benedek 2017

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
 SEMESTER S4

SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Course Code PCECT402 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Mathematics for Electrical
and Physical Sciences
Prerequisites (if any) (GYMAT101,
Course Type Theory
GYMAT201)
Course Objectives:

1. To provide sufficient understanding of different types of signals and systems in time and
frequency domain.
2. Analyze LTI systems in time and frequency domain using different transforms

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to signals and systems:
Continuous time and discrete time signals - Elementary signals,
Classification of signals, Basic signal operations.
Continuous time and discrete time systems – Representation and
1 Classification (memory, causal, stable, linear, time-invariant, invertible)
Convolution integral and convolution sum operations. 11
Continuous time and discrete time LTI systems-Stability and causality
of LTI systems.

Frequency domain representation of continuous time signals:

Continuous time Fourier series - Exponential Fourier series
representation of periodic signals.
Continuous time Fourier transform - Convergence and Gibbs
2 phenomenon, Continuous time Fourier transform of standard signals,
Properties of Continuous time Fourier transform, Inverse Transform. 11
Bilateral Laplace Transform, Concept of ROC, Relation of Laplace
transform to Fourier Transform.
 Sampling of continuous time signals to discrete signals and
frequency domain representation of discrete time signals:
Conversion of continuous time signal to discrete time signal, Sampling
theorem for low pass signals, Nyquist criteria, Aliasing.

3 Discrete time Fourier series for discrete periodic signals. 11

Discrete time Fourier transform (DTFT)-Convergence condition, DTFT
of standard signals, Properties of DTFT, Inverse transform.
Z transform- ROC, Properties (Proof not needed), Inverse transform,
Relation between DTFT and Z-Transform.

Analysis of LTI systems using Transforms

Concept of transfer function-Frequency response, Magnitude response
and phase response.
Analysis of Continuous time LTI systems using Laplace and Fourier
4
transforms. 11
Analysis of discrete time LTI systems using DTFT and Z transforms,
Stability and causality using Z transform.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Classify continuous and discrete time signals and systems based on K2
CO1
their properties and perform basic operations on signals.
Determine the stability and causality of LTI systems using convolution K3
CO2
operations.
Analyze signals in frequency domain using various transforms and K3
CO3
examine their properties.
Interpret the use of various transforms to analyze continuous and K3
CO4 discrete time LTI systems.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 2 1

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Alan V. Oppenheim and
1 Signals and Systems Pearson 2/e, 2015
Alan Willsky
2 Signals and Systems Simon Haykin John Wiley 2/e, 2021

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
3/e, 2013
1 Signals and Systems Anand Kumar PHI
Principles of Signal Processing Oxford University 2/e, 2009
2 B P. Lathi
& Linear systems Press
Signals & Systems - Continuous 4/e, 2013
3 Rodger E. Ziemer Pearson
and Discrete
Brooks/Cole Publishing
Analog and Digital Signal 2/e, 2013
4 Ashok Ambardar Company
Processing
Signals and systems - Principles Cambridge University
5 Shaila Dinkar Apte 1/e, 2016
and Applications Press

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074
1
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104100

2 Same as above
3 Same as above
4 Same as above
 SEMESTER S4

LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

Course Code PCECT403 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Analog Circuits
Prerequisites (if any) (PCECT303) Course Type Theory
Course Objectives:

1. To develop skills to design and analyze circuits using operational amplifiers for various
applications.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Differential Amplifiers: Differential amplifier configurations using BJT,
DC Analysis - transfer characteristics; AC analysis - differential and
common mode gains, CMRR, input and output resistance, voltage gain,
constant current bias, constant current source.
Concept of current mirror: two-transistor current mirror, Wilson and
1
Widlar current mirrors.
11
Operational amplifiers (Op Amps): The 741 Op Amp, Block diagram,
Ideal Op Amp parameters, typical parameter values for 741, equivalent
circuit, open loop configurations, voltage transfer curve, frequency
response curve.
Op Amp with negative feedback: General concept of Voltage Series,
Voltage Shunt, Current Series and Current Shunt negative feedback, Op
Amp circuits with Voltage Series and Voltage Shunt feedback, Virtual
ground concept.
Analysis of inverting and non-inverting amplifier for closed loop gain,
2
Input Resistance and Output Resistance.
11
Op Amp applications: Summer, Voltage Follower, Differential and
Instrumentation Amplifiers, Voltage to Current and Current to Voltage
converters, Integrator, Differentiator, Precision Rectifiers, Comparators,
Schmitt Triggers, Log and Antilog amplifiers.
 Oscillators and Multivibrators: Phase Shift and Wien-bridge Oscillators,
Triangular and Sawtooth waveform generators, Astable and Monostable
multivibrators.
Active filters: Comparison with passive filters, First and Second order
3 Low pass, High pass, Band pass and Band Reject active filters, State 11
Variable filters.
Voltage Regulators: Fixed and Adjustable voltage regulators, IC 723 –
Low voltage and High voltage configurations, Current boosting, Current
limiting, Short circuit and Fold-back protection.
Timer and VCO: Timer IC 555 - Functional diagram, Astable and
monostable operations, Basic concepts of Voltage Controlled Oscillator
and application of VCO IC LM566.
Phase Locked Loop: Basic building block, Operation, Closed loop

4 analysis, Lock and capture range, Applications of PLL, PLL IC565.

11
Data Converters: Digital to Analog converters, Specifications, Weighted
resistor type and R-2R Ladder type.
Analog to Digital Converters: Specifications, Flash type and Successive
approximation type.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Summarize the concepts of operational amplifiers and differential K2
CO1
amplifier configurations

CO2 Design operational amplifier circuits for various applications. K3

CO3 Choose integrated circuit chips for various linear circuit applications. K2

CO4 Implement various applications using specific integrated circuit chips K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 2 1

CO2 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Linear Integrated Circuits Roy D. C. and S. B. Jain New Age International 5/e, 2018

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Design with Operational
1 Amplifiers and Analog Sergio Franco Tata McGraw Hill 3/e, 2017
Integrated Circuits
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated
2 Gayakwad R. A. Prentice Hall 4/e, 2015
Circuits
3 Integrated Circuits Botkar K. R. Khanna Publishers 10/e, 2013
Butterworth &
4 Operational Amplifiers C.G. Clayton Company Publ. Ltd. 5/e, 2005
Elsevier
Operational Amplifiers & R.F. Coughlin &
5 PHI 6/e, 2000
Linear Integrated Circuits Fredrick Driscoll
Operational Amplifiers & Oxford University
6 David A. Bell 3/e, 2011
Linear ICs Press
Sedra A. S. and K. C. Oxford University
7 Microelectronic Circuits 6/e, 2013
Smith Press

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101106
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101106
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101106
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101106
 SEMESTER S4

MICROCONTROLLERS

Course Code PBECT404 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PBECT304-Logic
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
Circuit Design
Course Objectives:

1. To learn Microcontroller architecture and its programming

2. To learn embedded system design to develop a product.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Microcontroller Architecture – General internal architecture, Address
bus, Data bus, control bus.
The Microcontroller 8051: Features of 8051 microcontroller, Block
1
diagram of 8051- program status word (PSW), accumulator, program
9
counter. Memory organization – RAM & ROM, register banks and stack,
Special Function Registers (SFRs), I/O port organization, Interrupts.
Instruction Set of 8051 & Addressing modes: Classification of
instruction set - Data transfer group, arithmetic group, logical group,

2 branching group.
Addressing modes - Types. Accessing the data from internal and external 9
memory.
Programming 8051 Using Assembly Language: Introduction to 8051
assembly language programming. Data types & directives, Concept of

3 subroutine. Software delay programming. 9

Programming 8051 Using Embedded C Language: Introduction to
embedded C – advantages.
Timer / Counter in 8051: Timer registers - Timer0, Timer1.

4 Configuration of timer registers. Timer mode programming. Counter

9
mode.
 Serial Communication in 8051: Serial communication – modes and
protocols, RS-232 pin configuration and connection. Serial port
programming – transmitting and receiving.
Programming the interrupts: Use external, timer and serial port
interrupts. Interrupt priority settings.

Suggestion on Project Topics

1. Interface any known ADC chip to 8051 uC. Read the variation in voltage from a potentiometer
and display it on an LCD module.
2. Interface any known DAC chip to 8051 uC. Generate a Sine waveform of 1KHz at any port pin.
3. DC motor interface for speed and direction control.
4. Stepper motor interface - Unit step control, Rotation angle control, Speed control, Direction
control
5. Read the Temperature sensor and display it on LCD.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from  2 questions will be given from each module, out
each module. of which 1 question should be answered.
 Total of 8 Questions,  Each question can have a maximum of 2 sub
40
each carrying 2 marks divisions.
(8x2 =16 marks)  Each question carries 6 marks.
(4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Outline Architecture of Microcontroller K2
CO2 Develop Microcontroller programs K5

CO3 Design various interfaces to Microcontroller K5

CO4 Design and implement an Embedded System K6

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The 8051 Microcontroller and Muhammad Ali Mazidi
Second,
1 Embedded Systems Using Janice Gillispie Mazidi Prentice Hall -Inc
Rolin D. McKinlay 2007
Assembly and C
The 8051 Microcontroller Kenneth J Ayala
2 Architecture, Programming and Dhananjay V Gadre Cengage Learning 2010
Applications

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 8051 hardware Description Datasheet Intel Corporation 1992
Microprocessors and
2 Microcontrollers Lyla B. Das Pearson Education 2011
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100
2 Microcontrollers and Applications - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104072

PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/
Presentation
Lecture Laboratory
Project identification (Progress and Final
delivery Work/
Presentations)
Workshops
Group
Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
discussion
Question Project Milestone Reviews,
answer Analytical thinking
Feedback,
Sessions/ and Testing
Project reformation (If
Brainstorming self-learning
Sessions
required)
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to
Experts)
5 minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30
1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

 Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

 Research and background understanding
 Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

 Individual contribution to the presentation

 Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

 Active participation and individual contribution

 Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

 Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

 Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
 Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

 Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

 Individual contribution to the presentation
 Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

 Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

 Innovation and originality in the project
 Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S4

INSTRUMENTATION

Course Code PEECT 411 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory
Course Objectives:

1. This course aims to introduce the basic concepts of electronic measuring instruments.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to measuring instruments
Generalized Configurations and Functional elements of Instrumentation

1 systems, Need for Measurement Systems, Classification of Types of

Measuring instruments. Static and Dynamic characteristics of measuring 9
instruments.
Sensors and Transducers
Classification and selection criteria of Transducers
Principles of operation, construction, theory, advantages and
disadvantages, applications of
Resistive Transducers: Potentiometers, strain gauges, (metallic and
2
semi-conductor type), Resistance Thermometer, Thermistors.
Inductive Transducers: LVDT (Linear variable differential 9
transformer).
Capacitive Transducers: various capacitive transducers based upon
familiar equation of capacitance (capacitive microphone)
Electronic Measuring Instruments
Digital storage oscilloscope, Working principle and applications of
3 9
waveform analyser, digital frequency meter, harmonic distortion meter,
harmonic analyser, spectrum analyser and logic state analyser IEEE -
 488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Instruments with application.
EMI,
Grounding and Shielding
PLC Programming
Basic PLC Programming: Programming ON/OFF Inputs, Creating
Ladder diagrams, Register Basics, PLC Timers and Counters, PLC

4 Arithmetic functions, Number comparison functions, Data handling

9
Functions: Skip function and applications; master control relay function
and applications; jump with non-return and return; data table, register
and other move functions, PLC functions with BITS.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Interpret the basic concepts of measuring instruments, its K2
CO1
classification, and selection criteria.
Outline the principle, construction and working of transducers for K2
CO2
measuring physical variables.
Comprehend the principle, construction and working of various K2
CO3
electronic measuring instruments.

CO4 Apply PLC programming for selected industrial processes. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 3

CO2 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Doebelin's Measurement Ernest Doebelin,
1 Tata McGraw Hill 6/e, 2011
Systems Dhanesh N. Manik
2 Electronic Instrumentation Kalsi H S Tata McGraw Hill 4/e, 2019
Programmable Logic
John R Hackworth,
3 controllers Programming Pearson Education 3/e, 2022
Frederick D Hackworth
Methods and Applications
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
“Electrical and Electronics 2023
1 Measurements and Sawhney AK, Dhanpat Rai and Sons
Instrumentation,”
“Programmable Logic
John W Webb, Ronald
2 Controllers- Principles and Pearson 5/e, 2015
A. Reis,
applications

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105064/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/
 SEMESTER S4

POWER ELECTRONICS

Course Code PEECT 412 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Analog Circuits
Prerequisites (if any) (PCECT303) Course Type Theory
Course Objectives:

1. To study the characteristics of power electronic devices.

2. To study different power converter circuits.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Scope and applications of Power Electronics, Properties
of ideal switch.
Structure and static characteristics: Power diodes, Power BJT, Power
MOSFET & IGBT – comparison. Basic principles of wide band gap
1
devices – SiC & GaN.
9
Safe Operating Area: Power BJT, Power MOSFET & IGBT. Drive
Circuits: Power BJT and Power MOSFET (any two example circuits –
no analysis).
SCR: Structure, two transistor analogy, static characteristics.
Rectifiers: Three phase diode bridge rectifiers, Single phase half-
controlled rectifier with R load – Single phase fully controlled bridge

2 rectifier (continuous conduction) – output voltage equation. Principle of

three phase half wave controlled rectifier– (average output voltage 9
equation for continuous load current) – related simple problems (1-phase
& 3-phase).
DC – DC Switch Mode Converters: Buck, Boost and Buck-boost DC-
DC converters. Waveforms and expression of DC-DC converters for
3 9
output voltage, voltage and current ripple under continuous conduction
mode.
 Isolated converters: Flyback, Forward, Push Pull, Half bridge and Full
bridge converters – Waveforms and governing equations.
DC-AC Switch Mode Inverters: Inverter topologies, Driven
Inverters: Push-Pull, Half bridge and Full bridge configurations, Single

4 phase PWM inverters (Single pulse width and sinusoidal pulse width
9
modulation) – rms output voltage equation and output voltage
waveforms.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Outline the operation of power semiconductor devices and its K2
CO1
characteristics.

CO2 Design and analyze various rectifier circuits for power devices K3

CO3 Analyze different power converter circuits K3

CO4 Illustrate different types of inverter circuits K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Reprint
Power Electronics Essentials &
1 L Umanand Wiley India Edition
Applications
2014
Power Electronics Circuits, Third
2 Muhammad H Rashid Pearson India
Devices, and Applications Edition
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ned Mohan, Tore M
Power Electronics Converters, Third
1 Undeland, William P. Wiley India
Applications, and Design Edition
Robbins
Second
Power Electronics Principles
2 Joseph Vithayathil Tata McGraw-HILL Reprint
and Applications
2010
3 Power Electronics Daniel W Hart McGraw-HILL 2011
Milligan, J. W.,
doi:10.110
SiC and GaN Wide Bandgap Sheppard, S., Pribble, 2007 IEEE Radar
4 9/radar.200
Device Technology Overview, W., Wu, Y.-F., Muller, Conference.
7.374395.
G., &Palmour, J. W

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fOZ8bUrFJGk

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/108/117108124/

4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Dg5AIy0bY1A
 SEMESTER S4

MACHINE LEARNING

Course Code PEECT413 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0--0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) NONE Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide a comprehensive understanding of machine learning principles and

techniques.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review: supervised, unsupervised machine learning techniques,
dimensionality reduction techniques-PCA, SVD

Instance-Based vs Model-Based Learning, Machine Learning models,

1 Hyper parameters, regularization, Training - Batch and Online Learning,
9
Challenges of Machine Learning: Data Issues-Quality, Relevancy, Over
fitting, under fitting. Bias, variance, Performance metrics: Accuracy
Recall, Precision, ROC curve

Regression: linear regression, logistic regression error functions in

regression, MSE, L1, L2, Cross entropy multivariate regression.
2 Classification: Naive Bayes classifier, Support Vector machines,
Decision trees -random forests, Ensemble methods: boosting, bagging. 9

Unsupervised learning: Clustering-K-means, High, Hierarchical

clustering, criterion functions for clustering, proximity measures,

3 Euclidean, Manhattan, Minkowski Distances, Cosine Similarity. 7

Reinforcement Learning: Agent based learning, Q-learning,
Introduction to HMM models
 Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks: Biological Neuron,
Perceptron, Training, limitations, XOR problem, Multilayer perceptron,

4 Gradient based learning, stochastic gradient descent, Activation

11
Functions-Sigmoid, ReLU, tanh. Back propagation- Chain rule,
Regularization- L1, L2,

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Analyze and apply supervised and unsupervised machine learning K4
CO1
techniques to solve various data-driven problems.

CO2 Develop, train, and optimize regression and classification models K3

Design and execute clustering techniques, and assess their K3
CO3
effectiveness using various proximity measures.
Apply unsupervised learning techniques and understand reinforcement K3
CO4
learning for complex problem-solving.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 2 2 1 2

CO2 3 2 2 1 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 2

CO4 3 2 2 1 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Hands-on Machine learning Second
with Sc-kit Learn Keras and
1 Tensorflow Aurelien Geron Oreilly edition
(module 1) 2019
Machine learning for absolute Second
2 Oliver Theobald
beginners edition
Learning Deep Learning
3 Magnus Ekman Addison -Wesley 2022
(for module 4)
Introduction to Machine Andreas C. Müller &
4 O’Reilly 2017
learning with Python Sarah Guido

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
“Pattern Recognition and
Machine Learning”
1 . Bishop, C. M. Springer, New York, 2006.

Theodoridis, S. and Academic Press, San

2 “Pattern Recognition”. 2003
Koutroumbas, K. Diego,.
Artificial Intelligence : a
3 Russell, Stuart J. :Prentice Hall, 2010.
Modern Approach.
Andrew Ng and Tengyu https://cs229.stanford.
4 CS229 Lecture Notes 2023
Ma edu/main_notes.pdf

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_cs18/preview ( For modules 1,2 and 3)
2 https://see.stanford.edu/Course/CS229
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_cs18/preview
4 https://www.3blue1brown.com/topics/neural-networks
 SEMESTER S4

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING

Course Code PEECT414 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PROGRAMMING
Prerequisites (if any) IN C Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the basic concepts of object-oriented design techniques.

2. To give a thorough understanding of the basics of Java programming

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction:
Approaches to Software Design - Functional Oriented Design, Object
Oriented Design, Case Study of Automated Fire Alarm System.
1
Introduction to Java - Java Buzzwords, Java program structure, Java
7
compiler, Bytecode, Java Virtual Machine (JVM), Comments, Lexical
Issues.
Core Java Fundamentals:
Primitive Data types - Integers, Floating Point Types, Characters,
Boolean. Literals, Variables, Type Conversion and Casting, Arrays,
Strings- String Handling functions.

2 Operators - Arithmetic Operators, Bitwise Operators, Relational 9

Operators, Boolean Logical Operators, Assignment Operator,
Conditional (Ternary) Operator, Operator Precedence.
Control Statements - Selection Statements, Iteration Statements and
Jump Statements.
Object Oriented Programming in Java - Class Fundamentals,
Declaring Objects, Object Reference, Access Control, Introduction to
 Methods, Constructors, this Keyword, Method Overloading. Inheritance
- Super Class, Sub Class, The Keyword super, protected Members,
Method Overriding.
More features of Java:
Packages - Defining Package, CLASSPATH, Importing Packages.
Exception Handling - Checked Exceptions, Unchecked Exceptions, try

3 Block and catch Clause, Multiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements, 10
throw, throws and finally.
Input/output - I/O Basics, Reading Console Input, Writing Console
Output, Print Writer Class, Working with Files.
Advanced features of Java:
Swings fundamentals - Swing Key Features, Model View Controller
(MVC), Swing Controls, Components and Containers, Swing Packages,

4 Event Handling in Swings, Swing Layout Managers, Exploring Swings

10
–JFrame, JLabel, The Swing Buttons, JtextField..
Java DataBase Connectivity (JDBC) - JDBC overview, Creating and
Executing Queries – create table, delete, insert, select.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Summarize the object-oriented concepts - classes, objects, K2

CO1 constructors, data hiding, inheritance and polymorphism and to

illustrate it using UML diagrams.
Utilise datatypes, operators, control statements, object oriented K3
CO2
class, object concepts in Java to develop programs.
Illustrate how robust programs can be written in Java using K3

CO3 packages, exception handling mechanism and Input/ Output

Streams with Files.
Identify and utilize various Swing controls, components, and K3
CO4
containers.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 2 2 3

CO2 3 2 2 3

CO3 3 2 2 3

CO4 3 2 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Java: The Complete Reference Herbert Schildt Tata McGraw Hill 8/e, 2011.
Fundamentals of Software 4th edition,
2 Rajib Mall PHI
Engineering, 2014.
Java How to Program, Early Paul Deitel, Harvey 11th
3 Pearson, Edition,
Objects Deitel, 2018.

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Programming JAVA a Primer Balagurusamy E McGraw Hill 5/e, 2014.
Object Oriented Systems
2 Development using the Unified Ali Bahrami McGraw-Hill Int. 2017
Modeling Language
Introduction to Java
3 Y. Daniel Liang Pearson 7/e, 2013.
Programming
Core Java: An Integrated
4 Nageswararao R. Dreamtech Press 2008
Approach
5 Java in A Nutshell Flanagan D O'Reilly 5/e, 2005.
Object Oriented Design with
6 Barclay K.J. Savage, Elsevier 2004
UML and Java
7 Head First Java Sierra K. O'Reilly 2/e, 2005.

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_cs08/preview
 SEMESTER S4
DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
Course Code PEECT416 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PBECT304: Logic
Prerequisites (if any) Circuit Design Course Type Theory
Course Objectives:

1. To acquire knowledge about Asynchronous and clocked Synchronous sequential circuit

design.
2. To detect the faults and hazards in digital circuit design
3. To design and implement digital circuits using VHDL.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Clocked Synchronous Networks, Analysis of Clocked Synchronous

1 Sequential Networks (CSSN), Modeling of CSSN, State assignment and 10

reduction, Design of CSSN.

ASM Chart and its realization.

Asynchronous Sequential Circuits, Analysis of Asynchronous
2 10
Sequential Circuits (ASC), Flow table reduction, Races in ASC, State
assignment problem and the transition table.

Hazards – static and dynamic hazards in combinational networks,

Essential Hazards, Design of Hazard free circuits, Data synchronizers,
Mixed operating mode asynchronous circuits, Practical issues- clock
3 8
skew and jitter, Synchronous and asynchronous inputs.
Faults: Fault table method – path sensitization method – Boolean
difference method.
VLSI Design flow: Design entry: Schematic, Data types and objects,
different modelling styles in VHDL - Dataflow, Behavioural and
4 8
Structural Modelling. VHDL constructs and codes for combinational
and sequential circuits.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each
 Total of 8 Questions, module, out of which 1 question should be
each carrying 3 marks answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyze asynchronous and clocked synchronous sequential circuits K3

CO2 Design hazard-free digital circuits K3

CO3 Identify faults in digital circuits K3

CO4 Apply VHDL programming in digital system design K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 2 2 2 3

CO3 3 3 2 2 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Digital Principles & Design Donald G Givone Tata McGraw Hill 1/e 2002
Digital Design with an
M.Morris Mano and
2 introduction to HDL, VHDL Pearson education 6/e, 2018
Michel.D.Ciletti
and Verilog
3 Digital Design John F Wakerly Pearson Education 4/e 2008
Digital Logic Applications and
4 John M Yarbrough Cengage India 1/e 2006
Design

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Miron Abramovici,
Digital Systems Testing and John Wiley & Sons
1 Melvin A. Breuer and 1994
Testable Design Inc
Arthur D. Friedman
2 Logic Design Theory N. N. Biswas PHI 1992
Introduction to Digital Design Richard E. Haskell,
3 LBE Books- LLC 2009
Using Digilent FPGA Boards Darrin M. Hanna
Digital Circuits and Logic
4 Samuel C. Lee PHI 1980
Design
Digital System Design Using Khanna Book FIRST,201
5 R. Anand
VHDL Publishing Company 3
Digital System Design using
6 Charles Roth PWS PUBLISHING 1997
VHDL
Digital System Design Using Lizy Kurian John,
7 Cengage 1 , 2012
st

VHDL Charles H. Roth

 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105132/
3 Lecture 15

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106177
 SEMESTER S4

DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND VLSI DESIGN

Course Code PEECT415 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3-0-0-1 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PBECT304 Logic Course Type Theory

Circuit Design

Course Objectives:

1. To equip students with comprehensive knowledge and skills in designing, analysing, modelling,
and optimizing clocked synchronous sequential networks (CSSNs).
2. To provide a thorough understanding of the designing, analyzing, and optimizing techniques of
asynchronous sequential circuits (ASCs).
3. To equip students with the knowledge and skills to identify and mitigate static and dynamic
hazards and to understand fault detection and testing methods.
4. To provide students with a comprehensive understanding of the VLSI design flow and the
application of VHDL constructs and coding for combinational and sequential circuits.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Clocked Synchronous Networks, Analysis of Clocked Synchronous

Sequential Networks (CSSN), Mealy machine, Moore machine, Modelling of
1 9
CSSN, State assignment and reduction, Design of CSSN, ASM Chart and its
realization.

Asynchronous Sequential Circuits, Analysis of Asynchronous Sequential

Circuits (ASC), Flow table reduction, Races in ASC, State assignment
2 9
problem and the transition table, Design of Asynchronous Sequential Circuits,
Design of ALU.
 Hazards – static and dynamic hazards in combinational networks, Essential
Hazards, Design of Hazard free circuits, Data synchronizers, Mixed
operating mode asynchronous circuits, Practical issues- clock skew and
jitter, Synchronous and asynchronous inputs, Flip-Flops and Simple Flip-
3 9
Flop Applications, switch debouncer.

Faults, Fault table method – path sensitization method – Boolean difference

method, Kohavi algorithm, Automatic test pattern generation – Built in
Self-Test (BIST)

VLSI Design flow: Design entry: Schematic, FSM & HDL, VHDL Hardware
Description Language, VHDL Modules, VHDL Processes, Different
modeling styles in VHDL, Data types and operators, Objects, Dataflow,
4 9
Behavioral and Structural Modeling, Synthesis, Simulation.

VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Evaluation Methods:

1. Experiments Using Design and Analysis Tools: (10 marks)

Students can perform specific experiments using tools like GHDL, iVerilog, ModelSim, Xilinx ISE,
Vivado etc.
Each experiment can focus on designing and simulating different types of circuits (synchronous,
asynchronous, combinational, sequential).

2. Course Project:
Comprehensive project involving design, modeling, and analysis of a digital system. (10 marks)

Project phases: Proposal, Design, Implementation, Testing, Final Report.

Presentations and Viva Voce:
Students present their projects and experiments, explaining design choices, methodologies, and results.
Viva voce to assess understanding and ability to answer related questions.

Sample Experiments:

Experiment 1: Basic Mealy/Moore Machine Design

 Objective: Design a simple Mealy/Moore machine to detect a specific sequence of bits (e.g.,
"101").
 Tools: VHDL/Verilog, GHDL, iVerilog, ModelSim/Xilinx ISE, Vivado.
 Steps:
1. Draw the state diagram for the sequence detector.
2. Write the VHDL or Verilog code for the Mealy machine.
3. Simulate the design to verify its functionality.

Experiment 2: Basic Flow Table Reduction

 Objective: Reduce the flow table for a simple asynchronous sequential circuit.
 Tools: Manual calculation, VHDL/Verilog for verification.
 Steps:
1. Given a flow table, perform flow table reduction.
2. Assign binary codes to the reduced states.
3. Implement the reduced state machine in VHDL or Verilog and simulate it.

Experiment 3: Identifying and Eliminating Static Hazards

 Objective: Identify and eliminate static hazards in a simple combinational circuit.

 Tools: VHDL/Verilog, GHDL, iVerilog, ModelSim/Xilinx ISE, Vivado.
 Steps:
1. Design a combinational circuit with a known static hazard.
2. Identify the static hazard in the circuit.
3. Modify the design to eliminate the static hazard and simulate it.

Experiment 4: Fault Detection Using Path Sensitization

 Objective: Use the path sensitization method to detect faults in a simple digital circuit.
 Tools: VHDL/Verilog, GHDL, iVerilog, ModelSim/Xilinx ISE, Vivado.
 Steps:
 1. Design a simple digital circuit.
2. Apply the path sensitization method to detect faults.
3. Implement and simulate the circuit in VHDL or Verilog to verify fault detection.

Sample Project Topics:

1. Design and Analysis of a Traffic Light Controller Using Mealy and Moore Machines
2. State Reduction and Assignment for a Sequence Detector
3. Design and Analysis of an Asynchronous Sequence Detector
4. Designing a Simple Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) with Flow Table Reduction and Hazard
Handling
5. Design of a Hazard-Free Circuit for a Critical Application
6. Implementing Data Synchronizers for Mixed Operating Mode Asynchronous Circuits
7. Comprehensive VLSI Design Project Using VHDL (e.g., Digital Clock, ALU, Traffic Light
Controller)
8. Synthesis and Simulation of Complex Sequential Circuits Using Different VHDL Modeling
Styles

Criteria for Evaluation: Lab Experiments (10 marks)

1. Understanding of Concepts (3 marks)

 Demonstrates a clear understanding of the theoretical concepts related to the
experiment.
 Correctly explains the purpose and expected outcomes of the experiment.
2. Implementation and Accuracy (3 marks)
 Correctly implements the design using appropriate tools.
 The design functions as expected without errors.
3. Analysis and Problem-Solving (2 marks)
 Effectively analyse the design to identify and resolve issues.
 Demonstrates problem-solving skills in addressing any encountered challenges.
4. Documentation and Reporting (1 mark)
 Provides clear and concise documentation of the steps and processes followed.
 The report includes diagrams, code snippets, and simulation results.
 5. Presentation and Communication (1 mark)
 Clearly presents the experiment and its results.
 Able to answer questions and explain the design choices.

Criteria for Evaluation: Course Project (10 marks)

1. Project Proposal and Planning (2 marks)

 Submits a well-defined project proposal outlining objectives, methodology, and
expected outcomes.
 Demonstrates thorough planning and a clear timeline for the project.
2. Design and Implementation (3 marks)
 Implements the project design accurately using appropriate tools and techniques.
 The design is functional and meets the project objectives.
3. Innovation and Creativity (2 marks)
 Introduces innovative ideas or unique approaches in the design and implementation.
 Demonstrates creativity in solving problems or optimizing designs.
4. Analysis and Testing (2 marks)
 Effectively analyzes the project design to identify and address any issues.
 Conducts thorough testing to verify the functionality and performance of the design.
5. Final Report and Presentation (1 mark)
 Submits a comprehensive final report detailing the project, including objectives,
design, methodology, analysis, and results.
 Clearly presents the project and its outcomes, and effectively communicates the key
points.

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each  2 questions will be given from each module,

module. out of which 1 question should be answered.
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
● Total of 8 Questions, 60
divisions.
each carrying 3 marks
 Each question carries 9 marks.
(8x3 =24marks)
(4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Design, analyze, and model clocked synchronous sequential networks

CO1 (CSSNs), optimize state assignment and reduction, and effectively K3
utilize ASM charts for the realization of complex digital systems.

Design and analyze asynchronous sequential circuits (ASCs), perform

CO2 flow table reduction, address race conditions and state assignment K3
problems, and design both ASCs and Arithmetic Logic Units (ALUs).

Identify and mitigate static and dynamic hazards in combinational

CO3 networks, design hazard-free circuits, address practical issues in digital K2
systems and apply fault detection and testing methods.

Explain the VLSI design flow, utilize various design entry methods,
CO4 apply different VHDL modeling styles, and develop and simulate VHDL K2
constructs for combinational and sequential circuits.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2

CO2 3 2 2

CO3 3 1 2

CO4 1 1 2 1 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

McGraw Hill
1 Digital Principles & Design Donald G Givone 2017
Education

Digital Design: Principles and

2 John F Wakerly Pearson India 4th, 2008
Practices

Digital Logic Applications and Cengage Learning

3 John M Yarbrough 1st, 2006
Design India

Digital Design: With an

Introduction to the Verilog M.Morris Mano and
4 Pearson 6th, 2017
HDL, VHDL, and Michel.D.Ciletti,
SystemVerilog

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Melvin A. Breuer, Miron

Digital Systems Testing and
1 Abramovici, Arthur D. Wiley-IEEE Press 1st, 1994
Testable Design
Friedman

2 Logic Design Theory Nripendra N. Biswas Prentice Hall 1993

Introduction to Digital Design

Using Digilent FPGA Boards: Richard E. Haskell
3 LBE Books- LLC 2019
Block Diagram / VHDL Darrin M. Hanna
Examples

Prentice Hall India

Digital Circuits and Logic
4 Samuel C. Lee Learning Private 1980
Design
Limited

Switching and Finite CAMBRIDGE

5 Zvi Kohavi, Niraj K. Jha 3rd 2009
Automata Theory UNIVERSITY PRESS

Khanna Publishing
Digital System Design Using
6 Rishabh Anand 1st, 2013
VHDL

Digital System Design Using Lizy Kurian John,

7 Cengage 1st, 2012
VHDL Charles H. Roth
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105132/
3
Lecture 15

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106177
 SEMESTER S4

ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Code UCHUT346 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2.30

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding of finance and costing for engineering operation, budgetary planning and
control
2. Provide fundamental concept of micro and macroeconomics related to engineering
industry
3. Deliver the basic concepts of Value Engineering.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basic Economics Concepts - Basic economic problems – Production
Possibility Curve – Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Law
of Demand - Law of supply – Elasticity - measurement of elasticity and
its applications – Equilibrium- Changes in demand and supply and its
1 6
effects

Production function - Law of variable proportion – Economies of Scale

– Internal and External Economies – Cobb-Douglas Production
Function

Cost concepts – Social cost, private cost – Explicit and implicit cost –
Sunk cost - Opportunity cost - short run cost curves - Revenue concepts

2 Firms and their objectives – Types of firms – Markets - Perfect 6

Competition – Monopoly - Monopolistic Competition - Oligopoly
(features and equilibrium of a firm)
 Monetary System – Money – Functions - Central Banking –Inflation -
Causes and Effects – Measures to Control Inflation - Monetary and
Fiscal policies – Deflation

Taxation – Direct and Indirect taxes (merits and demerits) - GST

3 6
National income – Concepts - Circular Flow – Methods of Estimation
and Difficulties - Stock Market – Functions- Problems faced by the
Indian stock market-Demat Account and Trading Account – Stock
market Indicators- SENSEX and NIFTY
Value Analysis and value Engineering - Cost Value, Exchange Value,
Use Value, Esteem Value - Aims, Advantages and Application areas of
4 6
Value Engineering - Value Engineering Procedure - Break-even
Analysis - Cost-Benefit Analysis - Capital Budgeting - Process planning

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Assignment/ Internal Internal

Attendance Case study/ Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Micro project (Written) (Written)

10 15 12.5 12.5 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 Minimum 1 and  2 questions will be given from each module, out
Maximum 2 Questions of which 1 question should be answered.
from each module.  Each question can have a maximum of 2 sub
 Total of 6 Questions, divisions. 50
each carrying 3 marks  Each question carries 8 marks.

(4x8 = 32 marks)
(6x3 =18marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Describe the fundamentals of various economic issues using laws and K2

CO1
learn the concepts of demand, supply, elasticity and production function.
Develop decision making capability by applying concepts relating to K3
CO2 costs and revenue, and acquire knowledge regarding the functioning of
firms in different market situations.
Outline the macroeconomic principles of monetary and fiscal systems, K2
CO3
national income and stock market.
Make use of the possibilities of value analysis and engineering, and K3

CO4 solve simple business problems using break even analysis, cost benefit
analysis and capital budgeting techniques.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 -

CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - 1 -

CO3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -

CO4 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 -

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Geetika, Piyali Ghosh
1 Managerial Economics Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
and Chodhury

H. G. Thuesen, W. J.
2 PHI 1966
Engineering Economy Fabrycky

3 R. Paneerselvam PHI 2012

Engineering Economics
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Leland Blank P.E,
1 Mc Graw Hill 7TH Edition
Engineering Economy Anthony Tarquin P. E.

2 Indian Financial System Khan M. Y. Tata McGraw Hill 2011

Engineering Economics and Donald G. Newman,

3 Engg. Press, Texas 2002
analysis Jerome P. Lavelle

Contemporary Engineering Prentice Hall of India

4 Chan S. Park 2001
Economics Ltd
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Course Code UCHUT347 CIE Marks 50

2:0:0:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Equip with the knowledge and skills to make ethical decisions and implement gender-sensitive
practices in their professional lives.
2. Develop a holistic and comprehensive interdisciplinary approach to understanding engineering
ethics principles from a perspective of environment protection and sustainable development.
3. Develop the ability to find strategies for implementing sustainable engineering solutions.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of ethics - Personal vs. professional ethics, Civic Virtue,
Respect for others, Profession and Professionalism, Ingenuity, diligence
and responsibility, Integrity in design, development, and research domains,
Plagiarism, a balanced outlook on law - challenges - case studies,
Technology and digital revolution-Data, information, and knowledge,
Cybertrust and cybersecurity, Data collection & management, High
technologies: connecting people and places-accessibility and social
impacts, Managing conflict, Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role of
1 confidentiality in moral integrity, Codes of Ethics.
6
Basic concepts in Gender Studies - sex, gender, sexuality, gender spectrum:
beyond the binary, gender identity, gender expression, gender stereotypes,
Gender disparity and discrimination in education, employment and
everyday life, History of women in Science & Technology, Gendered
technologies & innovations, Ethical values and practices in connection with
gender - equity, diversity & gender justice, Gender policy and
women/transgender empowerment initiatives.
Introduction to Environmental Ethics: Definition, importance and
historical development of environmental ethics, key philosophical theories
2 (anthropocentrism, biocentrism, ecocentrism). Sustainable Engineering 6
Principles: Definition and scope, triple bottom line (economic, social and
environmental sustainability), life cycle analysis and sustainability metrics.
 Ecosystems and Biodiversity: Basics of ecosystems and their functions,
Importance of biodiversity and its conservation, Human impact on ecosystems
and biodiversity loss, An overview of various ecosystems in Kerala/India, and
its significance. Landscape and Urban Ecology: Principles of landscape
ecology, Urbanization and its environmental impact, Sustainable urban
planning and green infrastructure.
Hydrology and Water Management: Basics of hydrology and water cycle,
Water scarcity and pollution issues, Sustainable water management practices,
Environmental flow, disruptions and disasters. Zero Waste Concepts and
Practices: Definition of zero waste and its principles, Strategies for waste
reduction, reuse, reduce and recycling, Case studies of successful zero waste
initiatives. Circular Economy and Degrowth: Introduction to the circular
3 economy model, Differences between linear and circular economies, degrowth 6
principles, Strategies for implementing circular economy practices and
degrowth principles in engineering. Mobility and Sustainable
Transportation: Impacts of transportation on the environment and climate,
Basic tenets of a Sustainable Transportation design, Sustainable urban
mobility solutions, Integrated mobility systems, E-Mobility, Existing and
upcoming models of sustainable mobility solutions.
Renewable Energy and Sustainable Technologies: Overview of renewable
energy sources (solar, wind, hydro, biomass), Sustainable technologies in
energy production and consumption, Challenges and opportunities in
renewable energy adoption. Climate Change and Engineering Solutions:
Basics of climate change science, Impact of climate change on natural and
human systems, Kerala/India and the Climate crisis, Engineering solutions to
mitigate, adapt and build resilience to climate change. Environmental
4 Policies and Regulations: Overview of key environmental policies and
6
regulations (national and international), Role of engineers in policy
implementation and compliance, Ethical considerations in environmental
policy-making. Case Studies and Future Directions: Analysis of real-world
case studies, Emerging trends and future directions in environmental ethics
and sustainability, Discussion on the role of engineers in promoting a
sustainable future.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Continuous internal evaluation will be based on individual and group activities undertaken throughout
the course and the portfolio created documenting their work and learning. The portfolio will include
reflections, project reports, case studies, and all other relevant materials.

 The students should be grouped into groups of size 4 to 6 at the beginning of the semester.
These groups can be the same ones they have formed in the previous semester.
 Activities are to be distributed between 2 class hours and 3 Self-study hours.
 The portfolio and reflective journal should be carried forward and displayed during the 7th
Semester Seminar course as a part of the experience sharing regarding the skills developed
through various courses.
Sl. Item Particulars Group/I Marks
No. ndividua
l (G/I)

1 Reflective Weekly entries reflecting on what was learned, personal I 5

Journal insights, and how it can be applied to local contexts.

2 Micro project 1 a) Perform an Engineering Ethics Case Study analysis and G 8

prepare a report

1 b) Conduct a literature survey on ‘Code of Ethics for

(Detailed Engineers’ and prepare a sample code of ethics
documentation of
the project, 2. Listen to a TED talk on a Gender-related topic, do a literature G 5
including survey on that topic and make a report citing the relevant
methodologies, papers with a specific analysis of the Kerala context
findings, and
reflections) 3. Undertake a project study based on the concepts of G 12
sustainable development* - Module II, Module III & Module
IV

3 Activities 2. One activity* each from Module II, Module III & Module IV G 15

4 Final A comprehensive presentation summarising the key takeaways G 5

Presentation from the course, personal reflections, and proposed future
actions based on the learnings.

Total Marks 50

*Can be taken from the given sample activities/projects

Evaluation Criteria:
● Depth of Analysis: Quality and depth of reflections and analysis in project reports and case
studies.
● Application of Concepts: Ability to apply course concepts to real-world problems and
local contexts.
● Creativity: Innovative approaches and creative solutions proposed in projects and reflections.
● Presentation Skills: Clarity, coherence, and professionalism in the final presentation.
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop the ability to apply the principles of engineering ethics in their K3
CO1
professional life.
Develop the ability to exercise gender-sensitive practices in their K4
CO2
professional lives
Develop the ability to explore contemporary environmental issues and K5
CO3
sustainable practices.
Develop the ability to analyse the role of engineers in promoting K4
CO4
sustainability and climate resilience.
Develop interest and skills in addressing pertinent environmental and K3
CO5
climate-related challenges through a sustainable engineering approach.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO2 1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO4 1 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2
 Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
2nd edition
Ethics in Engineering Practice Cambridge University
1 Caroline Whitbeck & August
and Research Press & Assessment
2011
Virtue Ethics and Professional Cambridge University November
2 Justin Oakley
Roles Press & Assessment 2006
2nd edition
Cambridge University &
3 Sustainability Science Bert J. M. de Vries
Press & Assessment December
2023
Sustainable Engineering Cambridge University
4 Bhavik R. Bakshi, 2019
Principles and Practice Press & Assessmen
M Govindarajan, S
PHI Learning Private
5 Engineering Ethics Natarajan and V S 2012
Ltd, New Delhi
Senthil Kumar
Professional ethics and human New age international
6 RS Naagarazan 2006.
values (P) limited New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Mike W Martin and 4" edition,
Ethics in Engineering Publishing Company
Roland Schinzinger, 2014
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi

Suggested Activities/Projects:

Module-II
● Write a reflection on a local environmental issue (e.g., plastic waste in Kerala backwaters
or oceans) from different ethical perspectives (anthropocentric, biocentric, ecocentric).
● Write a life cycle analysis report of a common product used in Kerala (e.g., a coconut, bamboo
or rubber-based product) and present findings on its sustainability.
● Create a sustainability report for a local business, assessing its environmental, social, and
economic impacts
● Presentation on biodiversity in a nearby area (e.g., a local park, a wetland, mangroves, college
campus etc) and propose conservation strategies to protect it.
● Develop a conservation plan for an endangered species found in Kerala.
● Analyze the green spaces in a local urban area and propose a plan to enhance urban
ecology using native plants and sustainable design.
● Create a model of a sustainable urban landscape for a chosen locality in Kerala.

Module-III
● Study a local water body (e.g., a river or lake) for signs of pollution or natural flow disruption and
suggest sustainable management and restoration practices.
● Analyse the effectiveness of water management in the college campus and propose improvements -
calculate the water footprint, how to reduce the footprint, how to increase supply through rainwater
harvesting, and how to decrease the supply-demand ratio
● Implement a zero waste initiative on the college campus for one week and document the challenges
and outcomes.
● Develop a waste audit report for the campus. Suggest a plan for a zero-waste approach.
● Create a circular economy model for a common product used in Kerala (e.g., coconut oil, cloth etc).
 ● Design a product or service based on circular economy and degrowth principles and present a business
plan.
● Develop a plan to improve pedestrian and cycling infrastructure in a chosen locality in Kerala

Module-IV
● Evaluate the potential for installing solar panels on the college campus including cost-benefit analysis
and feasibility study.
● Analyse the energy consumption patterns of the college campus and propose sustainable alternatives
to reduce consumption - What gadgets are being used? How can we reduce demand using energy-
saving gadgets?
● Analyse a local infrastructure project for its climate resilience and suggest improvements.
● Analyse a specific environmental regulation in India (e.g., Coastal Regulation Zone) and its impact on
local communities and ecosystems.
● Research and present a case study of a successful sustainable engineering project in Kerala/India (e.g.,
sustainable building design, water management project, infrastructure project).
● Research and present a case study of an unsustainable engineering project in Kerala/India highlighting
design and implementation faults and possible corrections/alternatives (e.g., a housing complex with
water logging, a water management project causing frequent floods, infrastructure project that affects
surrounding landscapes or ecosystems).
 SEMESTER S4

LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB

Course Code PCECL407 CIE Marks 50

0:0:3:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
PCECT303
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Lab
Course Objectives:

1. To study the design and implementation of various Linear Integrated Circuits.

2. To familiarize the simulation of basic Linear Integrated Circuits.

Details of Experiment
Part A – List of Experiments using Op Amps
Expt. No.
(Minimum seven experiments mandatory)
Familiarization of Operational amplifiers - Inverting and Non inverting amplifiers,
1
Integrator, Differentiator - frequency response, Adder, Comparators
2 Measurement of Op-Amp parameters
3 Difference Amplifier and Instrumentation amplifier
4 Schmitt trigger circuit
5 Astable and Monostable multivibrators
6 Waveform generators using Op Amps - Triangular and Sawtooth
7 Wien bridge oscillator - without & with amplitude stabilization
8 RC Phase shift Oscillator
9 Active first and second order filters (LPF, HPF, BPF and BRF)
10 Active Notch filter to eliminate the 50Hz power line frequency
11 Precision rectifiers
Part B – Application circuits using ICs
Expt. No
[Minimum three experiments are to be done]
1 Astable and Monostable multivibrator using Timer IC NE555
DC power supply using IC 723: Low voltage and high voltage configurations,
2
Short circuit and Fold-back protection.
3 A/D converters- counter ramp and flash type.
4 D/A Converters - R-2R ladder circuit
5 Study of PLL IC: free running, frequency lock range and capture range
 Part C – Simulation experiments
[The experiments shall be conducted using open tools such as QUCS, KiCad or
Expt No.
variants of SPICE]
]
Simulation of any three circuits from experiments 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 of
1
section I
2 Simulation of experiments 3 or 4 from section II

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.
 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record
 Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Design and implement basic linear integrated circuits using Op Amps. K4

CO2 Design and implement basic linear integrated circuits using linear ICs. K4
Design and simulate the functioning of basic linear integrated circuits and K4
CO3
linear ICs. using simulation tools.

CO4 Effectively troubleshoot a given circuit and analyze it K4

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 D. Roy Choudhary and New Age International 6th edition,
Linear Integrated Circuits
Shail B Jain Private Limited 2021
Introduction to Pspice Using
2 3rd edition,
Orcad for Circuits and M. H. Rashid Pearson
2015
Electronics
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Op-Amps And Linear
1 Integrated Circuits: Business Gayakwad PHI 2002
Management
2 D Roy Choudhury, Shail
Linear Integrated Circuits New Age International (2018)
Bala Jain

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_ee73/preview
1

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108111/

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding
of the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
 4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or
quality of program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the
subject.
5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S4

MICROCONTROLLER LAB

Course Code PCECL408 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PCECL307-Logic
Prerequisites (if any) Circuit Design and Course Type Lab
Simulation Lab
Course Objectives:

1. To learn Microcontroller Programming using Assembly and C language

2. To learn Microcontroller interfaces to various modules
3. To learn any advanced microcontrollers like ARM or higher.
4. To learn Embedded System Design

Details of Experiment

Expt.
Experiments
No.
PART A – Data manipulation experiments using Assembly language(Min 4 has
to be completed)
1 Multiplication of two 16-bit numbers.
2 Largest/smallest from a series.
3 Sorting (Ascending/Descending) of data.
4 Matrix addition.
5 LCM and HCF of two 8-bit numbers.
6 Code conversion – Hex to Decimal/ASCII to Decimal and vice versa.
PART B - Interface to Microcontroller Assembly/C language (Min 3 has
to be completed)
1 Time delay generation and relay interface.
2 Display (LED/Seven segments/LCD) and keyboard interface.
3 ADC interface.
4 DAC interface with waveform generation.
5 Stepper motor and DC motor interface.
 PART C - Interface with Advanced Microcontroller using C language (Min 3
has to be completed)
1 PWM generation for DC motor control.
2 Object/Visitor Counter.
3 UART interface to Bluetooth.
4 SPI/I2C interface to display.
5 Real-time clock.

* A minimum of 12 experiments is to be completed.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination
only upon submitting the duly certified record.
 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Develop 8051 Microcontroller programs K4
CO2 Design and implement various interfaces to the 8051 Microcontroller K4

CO3 Design and implement an Embedded System using a 8051 microcontroller K4

CO4 Design and implement an Embedded System using an ARM processor K4

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The 8051 Microcontroller and Muhammad Ali Mazidi
Second,
1 Embedded Systems Using Janice Gillispie Mazidi Printice Hall -Inc
2007
Assembly and C Rolin D. McKinlay
The 8051 Microcontroller
Kenneth J Ayala
Architecture, Programming and
2 Dhananjay V Gadre Cengage Learning 2010
Applications
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 8051 Hardware Description Datasheet Intel Corporation 1992
Microprocessors and
2 Microcontrollers Lyla B. Das Pearson Education 2011

ARM System-on-Chip Addison-Wesley

3 Architecture Steve Furber Educational Publishers 2000
Inc
System-on-Chip Design with
4 ARM Education
Arm(R) Cortex(R)-M Joseph Yiu 2019
Media
Processors

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100
1

2 Microcontrollers and Applications - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104072

3 Embedded System Design With ARM - https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs93

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

5. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding
of the theoretical background related to the experiments.
6. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

7. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

  Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper
documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

8. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or
quality of program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
  Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the
subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER 5
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S5

ELECTROMAGNETICS

Course Code PCECT501 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2Hrs. 30 Min.

Physics for Electrical

Prerequisites (if any) sciences Course Type Theory
(GBPHT121)

Course Objectives:

1. To impart knowledge on the basic concepts of electric and magnetic fields and its
applications.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Review of coordinate system-Rectangular, cylindrical and spherical

coordinate systems. Review of vector calculus- curl, divergence gradient.
Review of Coulomb’s law, Gauss’s law and Ampere’s current law.
1 Derivation of capacitance and inductance of two wire transmission line and
coaxial cable. Magnetic scalar and vector potential. Poisson and Laplace 12
equations, Determination of voltage and electric field using Laplace and
Poisson’s equation.

Maxwell’s equation from fundamental laws. Boundary condition of electric

field and magnetic field from Maxwell’s equations. Solution to wave
2
equation Propagation of plane EM wave in perfect dielectric, lossy medium,
10
good conductor, skin depth. Polarization of waves.

Reflection and refraction of plane electromagnetic waves at boundaries for

3 normal & oblique incidence (parallel and perpendicular polarization), Snell’s 10

law of refraction, Brewster angle. Power density of EM wave, Poynting

 vector theorem.

Transmission line as circuit elements (L and C). Transmission line equations

and characteristic impedance. Reflection coefficient and VSWR. Derivation
of input impedance of transmission line. Calculation of line impedance and
4
VSWR using smith chart. The hollow rectangular waveguide –TE and TM
12
wave-dominant mode, group velocity and phase velocity –derivation and
simple problems only.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out of
● Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Summarize the basic mathematical concepts related to electromagnetic

CO1 K2
vector fields.
Apply Maxwell’s equations in different forms to diverse
CO2 K3
electromagnetic problems.
Analyze reflection, refraction and power density of electromagnetic
CO3 K3
waves.
Analyse the propagation of EM waves in transmission lines and wave
CO4 K3
guides.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2

CO1 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2

2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Oxford University 7th edition,
1 Elements of Electromagnetics Matthew N. O. Sadiku
Press 2018

William Hayt and John McGraw-Hill Higher 9th edition,

2 Engineering Electromagnetics Buck Education 2019

Electromagnetic Waves and 1st edition

3 Y Mallikarjuna Reddy The Orient Blackswan
Transmission Lines 2015

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Schaum’s Outline of Mahmood Nahvi; Joseph 5th edition,

1
Elctromagnetics Edminister McGraw-Hill 2019

Engineering Electromagnetics 1st edition

2 B N Basu The Orient Blackswan
Essentials 2015

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee83/preview

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee83/preview

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/115101005

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/101/117101056/#
 SEMESTER S5

ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION

Course Code PCECT502 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-1-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 4 Exam Hours 2Hrs. 30 Min.
PCECT402 Signals and
Systems
Prerequisites (if any) GBMAT401 Probability, Course Type Theory
Random Process and
Numerical Methods

Course Objectives:

1. To analyse different analog and digital communication systems

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Block diagram of a communication system. Need for modulation. Amplitude
modulation, Equation and spectrum of AM signal, DSB-SC, SSB -pilot
carrier and Vestigial sideband systems.
Angle modulation: Narrow and wide band FM and their spectra, relationship
1
between FM and PM, Carson’s rule, pre-emphasis and de-emphasis filtering.
12
Comparison of AM and FM, Block diagram of FM receiver.
Superheterodyne receivers- Characteristics of receivers –image frequency.
Noise: external, internal, White noise.
Sampling and Quantization, SQNR for uniform quantization, Companding
2 Pulse code modulation, Transmitter and receiver. DPCM transmitter and 10
receiver. Delta modulation, Slope overload, Line codes.
Baseband data transmission of digital data through AWGN channel,
Mathematical model of ISI, Nyquist criterion for zero ISI, Signal modelling
for ISI, Raised cosine spectrum, Equalization,Zero forcing Equaliser.
3 12
Geometric representation of Signals-Gram-Schmitt procedure, Signal space.
Vector model of AWGN channel.
Matched filter and correlation receivers, MAP receiver, Maximum likelihood
 receiver.

Digital band pass modulation schemes-BPSK system and signal

constellation. BPSK transmitter and receiver. QPSK system and Signal
4 constellations. BER analysis of BPSK and QPSK in erfc. Plots of BER Vs
10
SNR. QPSK transmitter and receiver. Quadrature amplitude modulation and
signal constellation.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Illustrate the principles of analog communication systems K2
CO2 Explain the basic concepts of digital communication K2
Analyse the baseband transmission of digital data through AWGN
CO3 K3
channel
Apply various digital modulation techniques in the design of digital
CO4 K3
communication systems
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - -
CO2 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Simon Haykin and 5th Edition,
1 Communication Systems Wiley
Michael Moher 2020
Modern Digital and Analog Oxford University 5th Edition,
2 B.P. Lathi and Zhi Ding
Communication Systems Press 2018
Introduction to Analog and 2nd
Simon Haykin and
3 Digital Communication, An Wiley Edition,
Michael Moher
Indian adaptation 2022
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Principles of Communication Herbert Taub and Donald McGraw-Hill 4th Edition,
1
Systems L. Schilling Education 2013
John G. Proakis and McGraw-Hill 6th Edition,
2 Digital Communications
Masoud Salehi Education 2020
2nd
Communication Systems John G. Proakis and
3 Pearson Edition,
Engineering Masoud Salehi
2001
Digital Communications 4th Edition,
4 Simon Haykin John Wiley& Sons
Systems, An Indian Adaptation 2021
6th
Electronic communication
5 George Kennedy McGraw Hill Edition,
systems
2017
Introduction to Digital Cambridge 1st edition
6 Wayne Stark
Communications University Press 2023

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://youtu.be/hTAlcrqjNps?si=okoRHdUegx9pbOz3

2 https://youtu.be/s_vmLqT_6NQ?si=MF2OW6AaICiYKTfj
 SEMESTER S5
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Course Code PCECT503 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2Hr. 30 Min.

GBMAT301
Prerequisites (if any) Mathematics for Course Type Theory
Electrical Science -3

Course Objectives:

1. To study the elements of control system, modelling and perform stability analysis of systems.
2. To design control systems with compensating techniques.
3. To understand the state variable analysis method.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Basic Components of Control Systems, Open-Loop and
Closed-Loop Control Systems with examples.
Mathematical modelling of control systems: Electrical Systems and
1
Mechanical translational systems.
8
Transfer Function: Block diagram reduction techniques, Signal flow
graph, Mason’s gain formula.
Time Domain Analysis of Control Systems: Standard Test signals, Time
response of first order systems (unit impulse, step and ramp inputs) and
second order systems (step input only). Time response of undamped, under
2
damped, critically damped second order system to unit step signal, Time
8
domain specifications for a second order underdamped system, Steady state
error and static error coefficients.
Stability of linear control systems: Concept of BIBO stability, absolute
3 stability, Routh Hurwitz Criterion. 12
Root Locus Techniques: Introduction, properties and its construction.
 Frequency domain analysis: Frequency domain specifications
Relative stability: gain margin and phase margin. Stability analysis using
Bode plot and Nyquist stability criterion.
P, PI & PID controllers: Introduction.
Design of Compensators: Need for compensators, lag and lead
compensators using Bode plots(only design steps)
State Variable Analysis of Linear Systems:
State variables, state equations, state variable representation of electrical
4 systems. Transfer function from State equation, Solutions of the state
8
equations, state transition matrix, Controllability and observability -
Kalman’s Test.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyze the systems using transfer function approach K3
CO2 Perform time domain analysis and steady state analysis of systems K2
Determine the absolute stability and relative stability of a system using
CO3 K3
Routh Hurwitz Criterion and root locus
Apply frequency domain techniques to assess the system stability and to
CO4 K3
design different compensation techniques
Analyse system Controllability and Observability using state space
CO5 K3
representation
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
New Age International 7th Edition
1 Control Systems Engineering I.J. Nagarath, M. Gopal
Publishers 2022
10th
Benjamin C. Kuo, Farid
2 Automatic Control Systems Wiley Edition
Golnaraghi,
2017
Fifth
3 Modern Control Engineering Katsuhiko Ogata Pearson Edition
2015
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Joseph DiStefano, Allen Third
1 Feedback and Control Systems R. Stubberud, and Ivan J. McGraw Hill Edition
Williams 2013
Second
2 Control systems Ashok Kumar Tata McGraw-Hill Edition
2010
Fourth
Control Systems: Principles McGraw Hill
3 M Gopal Edition
and Design Education
2012
Nise's Control Systems 8th Edition
4 Norman S. Nise Wiley India
Engineering 2017

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://youtu.be/Cl23xQrvFhk?feature=shared
1
https://youtu.be/fsxSst10_cE?feature=shared
2 https://youtu.be/cLyT6OWcmyU?feature=shared
3 https://youtu.be/CZL7_Z0i1KQ?feature=shared
4 https://youtu.be/CrXOMBlYFp0?feature=shared
 SEMESTER S5
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Course Code PBECT504 CIE Marks 60
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Signals & Systems

Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
PCECT402

Course Objectives:

1. To describe signals mathematically and understand how to perform mathematical operations

on signals
2. To gain knowledge of Digital filters
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review of sampling, Z-Transform and DTFT
The Discrete Fourier Transform: DFT as a linear transformation (Matrix
Relation), IDFT, Properties of DFT and examples (proof not necessary).
1
Circular convolution, linear convolution using circular convolution, Filtering
9
of long data sequences, overlap save and overlap add methods.
Frequency Analysis of Signals using the DFT (concept only required)
Design of FIR Filters - Symmetric and Anti-symmetric FIR Filters, Design
of linear phase FIR filters using Window methods, (rectangular, Hamming
2 and Hanning). Design of IIR Digital Filters from Analog Filters
(Butterworth), IIR Filter Design by Impulse Invariance, and Bilinear 9
Transformation, Frequency Transformations in the Analog Domain.
Structures for the realization of Discrete-Time Systems - Block diagram and
signal flow graph representations of filters.
FIR Filter Structures: Linear structures, Direct Form.
3 9
IIR Filter Structures: Direct Form, Transposed Form, Cascade Form and
Parallel Form.
Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing:
 Decimation and Interpolation (Time domain and Frequency Domain
Interpretation ), Anti- aliasing and anti-imaging filter.
Efficient Computation of DFT: Fast Fourier Transform and computational
advantage over DFT, Radix-2 Decimation in Time FFT Algorithm.
Computer architecture for signal processing: Harvard Architecture,
4 pipelining, MAC, Introduction to TMS320C67xx digital signal processor,
9
Functional Block Diagram.
Finite word length effects in DSP systems: Introduction, fixed-point and
floating-point DSP arithmetic, ADC quantization noise.

Suggestion on Project Topics

Projects can include but not limited to, analysing various signals/finding their transforms and
designing filters for extracting different frequency components. Projects can be simulated or
implemented in hardware.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each  2 questions will be given from each module,
module. out of which 1 question should be answered.
● Total of 8 Questions, Each question can have a maximum of 2 sub 40
each carrying 2 marks divisions. Each question carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Illustrate fundamental properties and relations relevant to DFT and solve

CO1 K2
basic problems involving DFT-based filtering methods.

CO2 Design linear phase FIR filters and IIR filters of different specifications. K3

Realise the various FIR and IIR filter structures for a

CO3 K3
given system function.
Compute DFT efficiently using FFT method and to explain the
CO4 K2
architecture of a DSP processor.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 3 2
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Signal Processing using Vinay K. Ingle, John G. 3rd Ed.,
1 Cengage Learning
Matlab Proakis 2011
Think DSP: Digital Signal 2nd Ed.,
2 Allen B. Downey Green Tea Press
Processing using Python 2012
Discrete-Time Signal Alan V
3rd Ed.,
3 Processing Oppenheim, Ronald W. Pearson Education
2014
Schafer

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Ed,
1 Digital Signal Processing Shaila D. Apte Wiley
2019
Digital Signal Processing: A 4th Ed.,
2 Mitra S. K. McGraw Hill
Computer based Approach 2014
Digital Signal Processing: A Ifeachor E. C., Jervis B. 2nd Ed.,
3 Pearson Education
Practical Approach W. 2009
4th Ed.,
4 Digital Signal Processing Salivahanan S. McGraw Hill
2019

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102060
1
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105055
2 same as above

3 same as above

4 same as above
 PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/ Presentation
Lecture delivery Project identification Laboratory Work/ (Progress and Final
Workshops Presentations)
Group discussion Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
Question answer Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking and Feedback,
Testing
Brainstorming self-learning Project reformation (If
Sessions required)
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
Experts)
minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Allotted
Sl. No Evaluation for
Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3

4 Execution and Implementation 10

5 Final Presentations 5

6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3

Total 30
1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

● Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

● Research and background understanding
● Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

● Individual contribution to the presentation

● Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

● Active participation and individual contribution

● Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

● Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

● Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
● Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

● Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

● Individual contribution to the presentation
● Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

● Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

● Innovation and originality in the project
● Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S5
BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
Course Code PEECT521 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. This course will introduce the various aspects of biomedical engineering and its applications
described using engineering principles

2. The student will be able to understand the techniques and uses of modern diagnostic and
therapeutic equipment.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to bio-medical engineering,
Sources of bio-electric potential: Resting and action potential, propagation of
action potentials. Various bioelectric potentials (ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG,
EOG, EGG concept only.)
1 Electrode theory: Nernst equation, Electrode skin interface
Bio-potential electrodes: Microelectrodes, skin surface electrodes, needle 9
electrodes
Bio-potential amplifiers: instrumentation amplifiers, carrier amplifiers,
isolation amplifiers, chopper amplifiers
Heart and cardiovascular system: electro conduction system of the heart,
ECG lead configurations, Einthoven triangle, Electrocardiography, ECG
2 machine - block diagram, ECG recording system.
The human nervous system: Neurons, action potential of brain, brain waves, 9
placement of electrodes, EEG recording, evoked potential,
 Electrical activity of muscles: EMG signal acquisition and analysis.
Myoelectric control system. Electrical stimulation of the muscle and nerve,
Applications of EMG
Instruments for clinical laboratory: Oxymeters, blood cell counter, flame
photometer, Spectrophotometer
Therapeutic Equipments: Principles, block schematic diagram, working and
applications of pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators, heart–lung machine,
3 9
dialyzers, surgical diathermy equipment, ventilators
Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry system,
application of telemetry in medicine, single channel telemetry system for
ECG.
Medical Imaging systems (Basic Principle only): X-ray imaging - X-ray
machine, applications of X-rays in medicine.
Computed Tomograpy: Principle, image reconstruction, scanning system and
applications
4 Ultrasonic imaging systems: Basic pulse echo system, Different types of
9
Ultrasonics systems:, A-Scan, B-Scan, M-Scan, applications, real-time
ultrasonic imaging systems and probes.
Magnetic Resonance Imaging – Basic NMR components, Biological effects
and advantages of NMR imaging

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (K)
Outline the basic bioelectric potentials and their implications in K2
CO1
diagnostics
Summarize the principles used for diagnosis of abnormalities in the K2
CO2
cardiovascular system
Identify the techniques used for diagnosis and therapy in the K2
CO3
neuromuscular and myoelectric systems.
Illustrate the principle and working of different types of bio medical K2
CO4
equipment/devices
CO5 State various diagnostic medical imaging techniques. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Handbook of Biomedical Third
1 R. S. Khandpur Tata Mc Graw Hill
Instrumentation edition
Leslie Cromwell, Fred J.
Biomedical Instrumentation 2nd Edition,
2 Weibell, Erich A. PHI
and Measurement 2004
Pfeiffer,

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Medical Instrumentation 5th edition
1 John G Webster John Wiley
application and design 2020
Introduction to Biomedical 4th edition
2 J. J. Carr Pearson Education
Equipment Technology 2020
Principle of Biomedical Merrill
1st edition
3 Instrumentation and Richard Aston Education/Prentice
2007
Measurement Hall
Cambridge
Introduction to Biomedical 2nd edition
4 Barbara Christe University
Instrumentation 2017
Press,
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_fD9gOqiBVE

2 http://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/127106134/L16.html
 SEMESTER S5
DATA STRUCTURES
Course Code PEECT522 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hr. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise with different data structures and the techniques involved.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basic Concepts of Data Structures: Algorithms, Performance Analysis,
Space Complexity, Time Complexity, Asymptotic Notations
1
Arrays: Linear Search and Binary Search, Stacks, Queues-Circular Queues,
9
Priority Queues, Double Ended Queues, Evaluation of Expressions
Linked List: Self-Referential Structures, Dynamic Memory Allocation,
Singly Linked List- Operations on Linked List. Doubly Linked List, Circular
2
Linked List, Stacks and Queues using Linked List, Polynomial
9
representation using Linked List
Trees and Graphs: Trees, Binary Trees-Tree Operations, Binary Tree
Representation, Tree Traversals, Binary Search
3 Trees- Binary Search Tree Operations 9
Graphs, Representation of Graphs, Depth First Search and Breadth First
Search on Graphs, Applications of Graphs
Sorting and Hashing: Sorting Techniques – Selection Sort, Insertion Sort,
Quick Sort, Merge Sort and Heap Sort
4
Hashing- Hashing Techniques, Collision Resolution, Overflow handling, 9
Hashing functions – Mid square, Division, Folding, Digit Analysis
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):
Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Compare performance of algorithms using asymptotic notations K2
Solve real world problems efficiently using appropriate data structures
CO2 like arrays, linked list, stacks and queues. K3

Make use of nonlinear data structures like trees and graphs to design
CO3 K3
algorithms for various applications.
CO4 Apply and compare various techniques for searching and sorting. K3

CO5 Apply appropriate hash function to store and access a given dataset K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - -
CO2 3 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - -

CO3 3 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - -

CO4 2 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - -
CO5 3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - -
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher and Year
Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj
Fundamentals of Data Structures
1 Sahni and Susan Universities Press 2/e, 2008
in C
Anderson-Freed
2 Classic Data Structures Samanta D Prentice Hall India 2/e, 2009

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Data Structures: A Pseudocode Richard F. Gilberg,
1 Cengage Learning 2/e, 2005
Approach with C Behrouz A. Forouzan
Aho A. V., J. E. Hopcroft
2 Data Structures and Algorithms Pearson Publication 1/e. 1983
and J. D. Ullman
Introduction to Data Structures Tremblay J. P. and P. G.
3 Tata McGraw Hill 2/e, 1995
with Applications Sorenson
Cambridge University
4 Advanced Data Structures Peter Brass 2/e, 2018
Press
Theory and Problems of Data
5 Lipschuts S. Schaum’s Series 2/e, 2016
Structures
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
https://youtu.be/zWg7U0OEAoE
1
https://youtu.be/g1USSZVWDsY
https://youtu.be/PGWZUgzDMYI
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
2
https://youtu.be/PGWZUgzDMYI
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
https://youtu.be/tORLeHHtazM
3
https://youtu.be/eWeqqVpgNPg
https://youtu.be/9zpSs845wf8
https://youtu.be/KW0UvOW0XIo
4
https://youtu.be/gtWw_8VvHjk
 SEMESTER S5

SENSORS AND ACTUATORS

Course Code PEECT 523 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. The course on Sensors and Actuators typically aims to provide students with
comprehensive knowledge in the principles, design, and application of various sensors
and actuators used in real-world applications

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Sensors and actuators: Block diagram of a closed loop
control System, Sensors and Transducers, Sensors Classification, Sensor
1 Characteristics - Transfer Function, Calibration, Span (Full Scale Input),
Full-Scale Output, Accuracy, Precision, Hysteresis, Nonlinearity, Saturation, 9
Repeatability, Dead Band, Sensitivity, Resolution.
Position and Displacement Sensors - Potentiometric Sensors, Capacitive
Sensors, LVDT, Hall Effect Sensors
Pressure Sensors -Mercury Pressure Sensor, Bellows, Membranes, and Thin
plates, Piezoresistive Sensors, Capacitive Sensors.
2 9
Force, Strain, and Tactile Sensors - Strain Gauges, Tactile Sensors - Switch
Sensors, Piezoelectric Sensors, Piezoresistive Sensors, Capacitive Touch
Sensors, Acoustic Touch Sensors, Optical Touch Sensors, Piezoelectric
Force Sensors.
Flow Sensors - Ultrasonic Flow Sensors, Electromagnetic Flow Sensors.
3 Temperature Sensors - Resistance Temperature Detectors, Thermistors, 9
Thermocouple.
 Proximity Sensors - PIR sensors. Ultrasonic proximity sensors.
Smart Sensors - Block Diagram, Difference between Normal Sensor &
Smart Sensor, Advantages, Disadvantages and Applications.
Actuators: - Definition- classification-Electric, Hydraulic, Pneumatic
actuators.
Hydraulic System - Physical Components and typical circuit. Hydraulic
actuators - Linear actuators, Rotary actuators - Gear motor, vane motor.
4 Pneumatic System - Components and typical circuit. Pneumatic Actuators - 9
Bellows actuator, Flapper-nozzle, Diaphragm actuators for industrial control
valves.
Electric actuators- Solenoids, Stepper motors, DC motors, DC servo motors.
Electro-Pneumatic actuator; rotary output actuators, Linear output actuators.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Describe Sensor Fundamentals K2
Explain the basic principles and concepts of commonly used different
CO2 types of sensors, including their purpose, how they work, and the K2
various types of sensors available.
CO3 Illustrate the working principles of smart sensors K2
CO4 Explain the working principle of different types of actuators. K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fourth
1 Handbook of Modern Sensors Jacob Fraden Springer Edition,
2010
Second
2 Hydraulics and Pneumatics Andrew Parr Elsevier Science edition,
1999
Second
3 Process Control K. Krishnaswamy New Age International edition,
2009
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Sensors and Actuators in
Taylor & Francis
1 Mechatronics, Design and Andrzej M. Pawlak 1/e, 2016
Group
Applications
Mechatronic systems, Sensors
Taylor & Francis
2 and Actuators Fundamentals Robert H. Bishop 3/e, 2022
Group
and Modelling
Process Control
3 Curtis D. Johnson Pearson/Prentice Hall 8/e, 2019
Instrumentation Technology
4 Sensors and Transducers D. Patranabis PHI Learning 4/e, 2021

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee32/preview

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee32/preview
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee32/preview
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee32/preview
 SEMESTER S5
ARM ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING
Course Code PEECT524 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Programming in C Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce ARM Cortex M programming in assembly and C

2. To lay the foundation for practical embedded system design

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Embedded C: Fixed-width integer data types in C99, boolean type, mixing
types, manipulating bits in memory and IO ports, accessing memory mapped
IO using pointers, structures, packed structures, bit fields, casting address of
an object, unions.
[1] Ch. 4
1
Review of computer organization: Memory, CPU, IO, Introduction to Arm
9
cortex M architecture: Internal organization-general purpose and special
registers, instruction pipelining, memory model, bit banding, Arm assembly
language instruction format and operands
[1] Ch. 5
Arm assembly language programming: Loading constants into registers,
loading memory data into registers, storing data from registers to memory,
converting C assignment statements to assembly, memory address
2 calculations, Memory addressing examples: translating C pointer expressions
to assembly, translating C subscript expressions to assembly, translating 9
structure references to assembly, Stack instructions, data processing
instructions: updating flags in APSR, arithmetic instructions, bit
 manipulation instructions, shift instructions, bit field manipulation
instructions
[1] Ch. 6
Control structures in assembly language: instruction sequencing, conditional
branch instructions, translating if-then and if-then-else statements to
assembly, compound conditionals, implementing loops, speeding up array
3 9
access, Implementing functions: function call and return, register usage,
parameter passing, return values, temporary variables, preserving registers
[1] Ch. 7.
IO programming in assembly: Interrupts and exceptions, thread and handler
modes, entering the exception handler, returning from exception handler,
latency reduction techniques, priorities and nested exceptions,
synchronization, transfer rate and latency, buffers and queues, double
4 buffering, polled waiting loops, interrupt driven IO, DMA
9
[1] Ch. 8.
System initialization: Memory layout, cpu and vector table, C run-time
environment, System Timer
[1] Ch. 13

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions
 Part A Part B Total
● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Use the features of C that are frequently used in embedded systems K3
CO2 Explain a programmer’s view of processor architecture K2
Choose between programming at the level of assembly or C as
CO3 K3
appropriate
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Embedded
1 Software with the ARM Cortex Daniel W Lewis Pearson 2e, 2015
M3
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The Definitive Guide to ARM
1 Cortex-M3 and Cortex-M4 Joseph Yiu Elsevier 3e, 2014
Processors
Embedded systems with ARM
2 Cortex M Microcontrollers in Yifeng Zhu E-man Press 3e, 2018
Assembly and C

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106111/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105193/
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs93/preview
 SEMESTER S5

HIGH SPEED DIGITAL DESIGN

Course Code PEECT526 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

BASIC
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
ELECTRONICS

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the fundamentals of the effects of passive circuit elements on signal

propagation in high speed digital circuits
2. To understand the high speed properties of logic gates and the measurement techniques at
high frequencies
3. To analyse the effects of wiring, source, and load on the signal propagation from one end of a
circuit to the other end
4. To design the power supply and clock distribution circuits for high speed devices,
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
High Speed Digital Design: Fundamentals: Frequency and time, Time and
distance, Lumped versus distributed systems, four kinds of reactance-
1
ordinary capacitance and inductance, mutual capacitance and inductance,
9
Relation of mutual capacitance and mutual inductance to cross talk.
High Speed properties of Logic gates: Power, Quiescent vs active
dissipation, Active power driving a capacitive load, Active power due to
overlapping bias currents, Input power, Speed, Packaging (Power dissipation
analysis of only CMOS logic gates are required)
2
Measurement Techniques: Rise time and bandwidth of oscilloscope
9
probes, self inductance of probe ground loop, spurious signal pick up from
probe ground loops, special probing fixtures, Avoiding pickup from probe
shield currents, slowing down of a system clock, observing metastable states.
 Transmission Lines: Problems of point to point wiring, signal distortion,
EMI, cross talk. Infinite Uniform transmission line; ideal distortion less
lossless transmission line, RC transmission line, Skin effect, Proximity
3 9
effect, Dielectric loss. Effects of source and load impedance. Termination:
End terminator, Source terminators, middle terminators, AC biasing for end
terminators, Resistor selection, Cross talk in terminators.
Power system: Stable voltage reference, Uniform voltage distribution,
distribution problems, choosing a bypass capacitor.
Clock Distribution: Timing margin, Clock skew, Using low impedance
4
drivers, using low impedance distribution lines, delay adjustments, 9
Differential distribution, Clock signal duty cycle, Decoupling clock receivers
from the clock bus. Clock Oscillators, Canned clock oscillator, Clock Jitter.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Illustrate the fundamentals of the effects of passive circuit elements on
CO1 K2
signal propagation in high speed digital circuits
Describe the high speed properties of logic gates and the measurement
CO2 K2
techniques at high frequencies
Analyze the effects of wiring, source, and load on the signal
CO3 K3
propagation from one end of a circuit to the other end
Design the power supply and clock distribution circuits for high speed
CO4 K3
devices
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Second
High Speed Digital Design: A Howard Johnson & Prentice Hall PTR,
1 Edition,
Handbook of Black Magic Martin Graham
2008
Second
Noise Reduction Techniques in
2 Henry W. Ott John Wiley & Sons Edition,
Electronic Systems
1988
 Reference Books

Name of the Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher and Year

High-Speed Digital System

Stephen H. Hall First
Design—A Handbook of
1 Garrett W. Hall John Wiley & Sons Edition,
Interconnect Theory and Design
James A. McCall 2000
Practices
First
William S. Dally & Cambridge University
2 Digital Systems Engineering Edition,
John W. Poulton Press,
1998
First
High Speed Digital Circuits Addison Wesley
3 Masakazu Shoji Edition,
Publishing Company
1996
Digital Integrated Circuits: A Second
4 Design perspective, Jan M, Rabaey Pearson Edition,
2003

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105375

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105375
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105375, https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106069

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105375
 SEMESTER S5

ESTIMATION AND DETECTION

Course Code PEECT527 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. This course aims to impart the fundamentals of statistical signal processing theory in
engineering applications.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Statistical Estimation Theory I
Fundamentals of estimation theory, the mathematical estimation problem,
1 9
Minimum variance unbiased estimation, basics of Cramer-Rao Lower
Bound, linear models, best linear unbiased estimation, application examples.
Statistical Estimation Theory II
2 Maximum likelihood estimation, least squares, Bayesian philosophy, 9
minimum mean square error estimation, application examples.
Statistical Detection Theory I
Fundamentals of detection theory, the mathematical detection problem,
3 Hypothesis testing, classical approach, Neyman-Pearson theorem, likelihood 10
ratio test, receiver operating characteristics, Bayesian approach, minimum
probability of error, Bayes risk, multiple hypothesis testing.
Statistical Detection Theory II
4 Detection of deterministic signals, matched filters, detection of random
8
signals, estimator-correlator, linear model, application examples.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):
Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Summarize the fundamentals of statistical estimation principles used in
CO1 K2
various engineering problems.
Apply different types of estimation algorithms in engineering
CO2 K3
applications.
Illustrate the fundamentals of statistical detection principles used in
CO3 K2
various engineering problems.
Apply various types of statistical decision rules in engineering
CO4 K3
applications.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
“Fundamentals of Statistical
1 Signal Processing” Vol I: S.M. Kay, Pearson, 3/e, 2010.
Estimation Theory,
“Fundamentals of Statistical
2 Signal Processing” Vol II: S.M. Kay, Pearson, 3/e, 2010.
Detection Theory,

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Detection, Estimation, and
1 H. L. Van Trees John Wiley & Sons 2/e, 2001
Modulation Theory, Vol. I,
Statistical Digital Signal
2 Monson H. Hayes John Wiley & Sons 2/e, 2018
Processing and Modelling

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117103018

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117103018

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117103018
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117103018
 SEMESTER S5

ARM ARCHITECTURE, PROGRAMMING AND INTERFACING

Course Code PEECT525 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week ESE Marks
3:0:0:1 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 5 Exam Hours 2 Hrs.30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce ARM Cortex M programming in assembly and C

2. To lay the foundation for practical embedded system design

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Embedded C: Fixed-width integer data types in C99, boolean type, mixing
types, manipulating bits in memory and IO ports, accessing memory mapped
IO using pointers, structures, packed structures, bit fields, casting address of
an object, unions.
[1] Ch. 4
1 9
Review of computer organization: Memory, CPU, IO, Introduction to Arm
cortex M architecture: Internal organization-general purpose and special
registers, instruction pipelining, memory model, bit banding, Arm assembly
language instruction format and operands
[1] Ch. 5
Arm assembly language programming: Loading constants into registers,
loading memory data into registers, storing data from registers to memory,
converting C assignment statements to assembly, memory address
2 9
calculations, Memory addressing examples: translating C pointer expressions
to assembly, translating C subscript expressions to assembly, translating
structure references to assembly, Stack instructions, data processing
 instructions: updating flags in APSR, arithmetic instructions, bit
manipulation instructions, shift instructions, bit field manipulation
instructions
[1] Ch. 6
Control structures in assembly language: instruction sequencing, conditional
branch instructions, translating if-then and if-then-else statements to
assembly, compound conditionals, implementing loops, speeding up array
3 9
access, Implementing functions: function call and return, register usage,
parameter passing, return values, temporary variables, preserving registers
[1] Ch. 7.
IO programming in assembly: Interrupts and exceptions, thread and handler
modes, entering the exception handler, returning from exception handler,
latency reduction techniques, priorities and nested exceptions,
synchronization, transfer rate and latency, buffers and queues, double
4 buffering, polled waiting loops, interrupt driven IO, DMA 9
[1] Ch. 8.
System initialization: Memory layout, cpu and vector table, C run-time
environment, System Timer
[1] Ch. 13

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Interfacing experiments on Arm Microcontroller boards TM4C123G/ STM32 Nucleo

GPIO – push button, LED, keypad scan ([2] Ch. 14)
Toggling LED using timers ([2] Ch. 15)
Stepper motor control ([2] Ch. 16)
LCD interfacing ([2] Ch. 17)
ADC and DAC with DMA ([2] Ch. 19, 20, 21)
Serial Communication ([2] Ch. 22)

Course Project involving the design and implementation of an embedded system for a chosen
application
Project phases: Proposal, Implementation, Testing, Final Report, Presentations and Viva Voce

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
 Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions. Each 60
each carrying 3 marks question carries 9 marks.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Use the features of C that are frequently used in embedded systems K3
CO2 Explain a programmer’s view of processor architecture K2
Choose between programming at the level of assembly or C as K3
CO3
appropriate
CO4 Analyze the interfacing of peripherals K4
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Embedded
1 Software with the ARM Cortex Daniel W Lewis Pearson 2e, 2015
M3

Embedded systems with ARM

2 Cortex M Microcontrollers in Yifeng Zhu E-man Press 3e, 2018
Assembly and C

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

The Definitive Guide to ARM

1 Cortex-M3 and Cortex-M4 Joseph Yiu Elsevier 3e, 2014
Processors
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
Modern Embedded Systems Programming Course Quantum Leaps, LLC
1 https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLPW8O6W-
1chwyTzI3BHwBLbGQoPFxPAPM&si=vmU66G3vMmQihUPk
Modern Embedded Systems Programming Course Quantum Leaps, LLC
2 https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLPW8O6W-
1chwyTzI3BHwBLbGQoPFxPAPM&si=vmU66G3vMmQihUPk
Modern Embedded Systems Programming Course Quantum Leaps, LLC
3 https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLPW8O6W-
1chwyTzI3BHwBLbGQoPFxPAPM&si=vmU66G3vMmQihUPk
Modern Embedded Systems Programming Course Quantum Leaps, LLC
4 https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLPW8O6W-
1chwyTzI3BHwBLbGQoPFxPAPM&si=vmU66G3vMmQihUPk
 SEMESTER S5
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB
Course Code PBECL507 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
Signals & Systems,
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Lab
DSP

Course Objectives:

1. To realize the DFT, filtering techniques and familiarize DSP hardware

2. To implement Digital Filter.

Details of Experiment

Expt. Experiment
No Simulation of Signals Simulate the following signals using Python/
Scilab/MATLAB.
1
1. Unit impulse signal 2. Unit pulse signal 3. Unit ramp signal 4. Bipolar pulse 5. Triangular
signal
Verification of the Properties of DFT
1. Generate a DFT matrix and apply it to an example sequence.
2. Write a function that returns the N point DFT matrix VN for a given N.
3. Plot its real and imaginary parts of VN as images using matshow or imshow commands (in
Python) for N = 16, N = 64 and N = 1024
4. Compute the DFTs of 16 point, 64 point and 1024 point random sequences using the above
matrices.
2
5. Observe the time of computations for N = 2σ for different values of σ. (You may use
the time module in Python).
6. Use some iterations to plot the times of computation against x. Plot and understand this
curve. Plot the computation times for the FFT function over this curve and observe the
computational advantage of FFT.
Circular Convolution.
1. Write a python function circcon.py that returns the circular convolution of an N1 point
 sequence and an N2 point sequence given at the input. The easiest way is to convert a linear
convolution into circular convolution with N = max(N1, N2).
Parseval’s Theorem
Take two complex random sequences x1[n] and x2[n], and verify Parseval’s Theorem.
Familarization of DSP Hardware
1. Familiarization of the code composer studio (in the case of TI hard- ware)
or Visual DSP (in the case of Analog Devices hardware) or any equivalent
cross-compiler for DSP programming.
2. Familiarization of the analog and digital input and output ports of the DSP board.
3
3. Generation and cross compilation and execution of the C code to connect the input digital
switches to the output LEDs.
4. Generation and cross compilation and execution of the C code to connect the input analog
port to the output. Connect a microphone, speak into it and observe the output electrical
signal on a DSO and store it.
Linear convolution
1. Write a C function for the linear convolution of two arrays.
4
2. The arrays may be kept in different files and downloaded to the DSP hardware.
3. Store the result as a file and observe the output.
FFT of signals
1. Write a C function for N - point FFT.
2. Connect a precision signal generator and apply 1 mV , 1 kHz sinusoid at the analog port.
5
3. Apply the FFT on the input signal with appropriate window size and observe the result.
4. Connect microphone to the analog port and read in real time speech.
5. Observe and store the FFT values.
IFFT with FFT
1. Use the FFT function in the previous experiment to compute the IFFT of the input signal.
6
2. Apply IFFT on the stored FFT values from the previous experiments and
observe the reconstruction.
FIR low pass filter
1. Use Python/scilab to implement the FIR filter response h[n] = for a filter size N
= 50, ωc = 0.1π and ωc = 0.3π.
2. Realize the hamming (wH [n]) and kaiser (wK[n]) windows.
7
3. Compute h[n]w[n] in both cases and store as file.
4. Observe the low pass response in the simulator.
5. Download the filter on to the DSP target board and test with 1 mV sinusoid from a signal
generator connected to the analog port.
 6. Test the operation of the filters with speech signals.
Overlap Save Block Convolution
1. Use the file of filter coefficients from the previous experiment.
2. Realize the system shown below for the input speech signal x[n].

3. Segment the signal values into blocks of length N = 2000. Pad the last block with zeros, if
necessary.
4. Implement the overlap save block convolution method
9. Overlap Add Block Convolution
1. Use the file of filter coefficients from the previous experiment.
2. Realize the system shown in the previous experiment for the input speech signal x[n].
9
3. Segment the signal values into blocks of length N = 2000. Pad the last block with zeros, if
necessary.
4. Implement the overlap add block convolution method.

Course Assessment Method (CIE: 50 Marks, ESE 50 Marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work, experiments, Viva and

Internal
Attendance Timely completion of Lab Reports / Record. Total
Exam
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Result with

Conduct of experiment/
Preparatory valid inference/ Viva
Execution of work/ Record Total
work/Design/ Quality of voce
troubleshooting/ Programming
Algorithm Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

Mandatory requirements for ESE:

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Generate basic signal waveforms K2

CO2 Verify the properties of DFT K2

CO3 Familiarize with DSP hardware and interface with Computer K2

CO4 Implement LTI systems K3

CO5 Design and Implement FIR low-pass filters K3

K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 1 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 1
1: Slight (Low),2: Moderate (Medium),3: Substantial (High), : No Correlation
 Text Books

Sl. Name of the Edition

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher and Year
Digital Signal Processing Vinay K. Ingle, John G. 3rd Ed.,
1 Cengage Learning
using Matlab Proakis 2011
Think DSP: Digital Signal 1st Ed.
2 Allen B. Downey Green Tea Press
Processing using Python 2019
DSP applications using C and
3 Chassaing, Rulph Wiley & Sons 2/e. 2008
the TMS320C6x DSK

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Discrete-Time Signal
1 Alan V Oppenheim, 4th
Processing Pearson Education
Ronald W. Schafer Ed.,2018

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Sl. No. Link ID

1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6dFnpz_AEyA

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee20/preview

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding of

the upcoming experiment.

 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the

theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of experiments,

and following safety protocols.

 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and

troubleshooting skills during the experiments.

 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation of
experiments, data analysis and conclusions.

 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles during a
viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and understanding
each step involved.

 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing materials/equipment.

 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the experiment.

 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.
3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S5

COMMUNICATION LAB I

Course Code PCECL508 CIE Marks 50

Teaching
Hours/Week 0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Analog circuits, Signals
Prerequisites (if any) and systems, Digital Course Type Lab
Signal Processing

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding and Implementing Modulation and Detection Techniques

2. Analyzing and Evaluating Communication System Performance.

Details of Experiment

Expt. No Experiment

PART A: Hardware Experiments

Any one from the following Analog modulation schemes

1
● AM modulation and detection using Transistors or ICS
● FM modulation and detection

Hardware Experiment: Any one from the following Digital modulation & Waveform
coding Schemes

2 ● Generation and Detection of PCM signals

● Generation and Detection of Delta modulated signals
● Generation and Detection of BPSK
● Generation and Detection of QPSK

PART B: Simulation Experiments

1. Performance of Waveform Coding Using PCM

 2. Pulse Shaping and Matched Filtering

3. Eye diagram

4. Error Performance of BPSK

5. Error Performance of QPSK

PART C: Software Defined Radio

1. Familiarization with Software Defined Radio (Hardware and Control Software)

2. FM reception or FM transmission using SDR

Experiment Details

PART A: Hardware Experiments

The students shall design and setup simple prototype circuits with the help of available ICs. They can
observe waveforms produced by these circuits for standard ideal inputs

PART B: Simulation Experiments

The students shall write scripts to simulate components of communication systems for the following
experiments.

Performance of Waveform Coding Using PCM

1. Generate a sinusoidal waveform with a DC offset so that it takes only

2. positive amplitude value.
3. Sample and quantize the signal using a uniform quantizer with number of
4. representation levels L. Vary L. Represent each value using decimal to
5. binary encoder.
6. Compute the signal-to-noise ratio in dB.
7. Plot the SNR versus number of bits per symbol. Observe that the SNR
8. increases linearly

Pulse Shaping and Matched Filtering

1. Generate a string of message bits.

2. Use Root Raised Cosine (RRC) pulse p(t) as the shaping pulse, and generate the
 3. corresponding baseband signal with a fixed bit duration Tb. You may use roll-off factor as α
= 0.4. Vary the roll off rate and study.
4. Simulate transmission of baseband signal via an AWGN channel
5. Apply matched filter with frequency response Pr(f) =P*(f) to the received signal.
6. Sample the signal at mTb and compare it against the message sequence.
Eye diagram

1. Generate a string of message bits.

2. Use raised cosine pulse p(t) as the shaping pulse, and generate the corresponding baseband
signal with a fixed bit duration Tb You may use roll-off factor as α= 0.4
3. Use various roll off factors and plot the eye diagram in each case for the received signal.
Make a comparison study among them.

Error Performance of BPSK

1. Generate a string of message bits.

2. Encode using BPSK with energy per bit Eb and represent it using points in a signal-space.
3. Simulate transmission of the BPSK modulated signal via an AWGN channel with variance
No/2.
4. Detect using an ML, decoder and plot the probability of error as a function of SNR per bit
Eb/No.
Error Performance of QPSK

1. Generate a string of message bits.

2. Encode using QPSK with energy per symbol Eb and represent it using points in a signal-
space.
3. Simulate transmission of the QPSK modulated signal via an AWGN channel with variance
No/2 in both I-channel and Q-channel.
4. Detect using an ML decoder and plot the probability of error as a function of SNR per bit
Eb/N0 where Es=2Eb

PART C: Software Defined Radio

The students shall emulate communication systems with the help of software-defined-radio hardware
and necessary control software. Use available blocks in GNU Radio (or similar software's like
Simulink/ Lab- View) to implement all the signal processing.
Familiarization with Software Defined Radio (Hardware and Control Software)

1. Familiarize with an SDR hardware for reception and transmission of RF signal

2. Familiarize how it can be interfaced with computer
3. Familiarize with GNU Radio (or similar software's like Simulink/ Lab- View) that can be
used to process the signals received through the SDR hardware.
4. Familiarize available blocks in GNU radio. Study how signals can be generated and spectrum
(or power spectral density) of signals can be analyzed. Study how filtering can be performed.

FM reception using SDR

1. Receive digitized FM signal (for the clearest channel in the lab) using the SDR board.
2. Set up an LPF and FM receiver using GNU Radio.
3. Use appropriate sink in GNU Radio to display the spectrum of signal.
4. Resample the voice to make it suitable for playing on computer speaker. or playing on
compute

FM transmission using SDR

1. Use a wave file source.

2. Set up an FM transmitter using GNU Radio.
3. Resample the voice source and transmit using the SDR.

Course Assessment Method (CIE: 50 Marks, ESE 50 Marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work, experiments, Viva and

Internal
Attendance Timely completion of Lab Reports / Record. Total
Exam
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Result with

Conduct of experiment/
Preparatory valid inference/ Viva
Execution of work/ Record Total
work/Design/ Quality of voce
troubleshooting/ Programming
Algorithm Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

Mandatory requirements for ESE:

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Bloom’s

Course Outcome Knowledge

Level (KL)

CO1 Setup simple prototype circuits for waveform coding and digital
modulation techniques working in a team. K3

CO2 Simulate the error performance of a digital communication system using

standard binary and M-ary modulation schemes. K4

CO3 Develop hands-on skills to emulate a communication system with software-

designed-radio working in a team. K5

K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 - 1

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 2 - 3

1: Slight (Low),2: Moderate (Medium),3: Substantial (High), : No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The Hobbyist's Guide to the CreateSpace 2nd
1 RTL-SDR: Really Cheap Carl Laufer Independent Edition,
Software Defined Radio Publishing Platform 2015

Principles of Communication WH Tranter, KS 2nd

2 Systems Simulation with Shanmugan, TS Prentice Hall Edition,
Wireless Applications Rappaport, KL Kosbar 2006

1st
Digital Modulations using Mathuranathan Independently
3 Edition,
Python Viswanathan, " Published
2019

Reference Books
Sl. Name of the Edition
Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher and Year
5th
Simon Haykin and
1 Communication Systems Wiley Edition,
Michael Moher
2020

5th
Modern Digital and Analog Oxford University
2 B.P. Lathi and Zhi Ding Edition,
Communication Systems Press
2018

2nd
Introduction to Analog and Digital Simon Haykin and
3 Wiley Edition,
Communication Michael Moher
2006

6th
4 Electronic communication systems George Kennedy McGraw Hil Edition,
2017
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Sl. No. Link ID

Neel Pandeya, "Implementation of a Simple FM Receiver in GNU Ra- dio,"

1
https://kb.ettus.com/

Michael Ossmann, "Software Defined Radio with HackRF," YouTube Tutorial,

2
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BeeSN14JUYU

3 Nptel videos on Software Defined radio, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0KQWPFwFByU

4 Experimenting with software defined radio, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tx5xofG2Fxg

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding of

the upcoming experiment.

● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the

theoretical background related to the experiments.

2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of experiments,

and following safety protocols.

● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and

troubleshooting skills during the experiments.

● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation of
experiments, data analysis and conclusions.

● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles during a
viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and understanding
each step involved.

● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing materials/equipment.

● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the experiment.

● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER 6

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S6

ADVANCED COMMUNICATION THEORY

Course Code PCECT 601 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

ADC
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(PCECT 502)

Course Objectives:

1. To impart basics of information theory introducing both source coding and channel coding.
2. To impart the basic concepts of wireless communication system.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Entropy: Entropy, Properties of Entropy, Joint and Conditional
Entropy, Mutual Information, Properties of Mutual Information
Discrete memoryless sources, Source code, Average length of source
code, Bounds on average length, uniquely decodable and prefix-free
source codes. Kraft Inequality (with proof)
1
Shannon’s source coding theorem (both achievability and converse),
11
Huffman code, operational meaning of entropy.
Channel capacity, Capacity of discrete memoryless channels, Binary
symmetric channels (BSC), Binary Erasure channels (BEC). Capacity
of BSC and BEC, Shannon’s channel coding theorem
Channel Capacity of AWGN Channel: Differential entropy,
Differential Entropy of Gaussian random variable, Shannon-Hartley
theorem (with proof), Shannon limit
2
Block codes: Error detecting and correcting capability. Linear block
11
codes. Generator and parity-check matrix. (Systematic form only).
Encoding circuit, Maximum likelihood decoding of linear block codes.
 Bounded distance decoding. Syndrome, Standard array decoding.
Convolutional Codes. State diagram. Trellis diagram. Maximum
likelihood decoding. Viterbi algorithm.
Introduction to Wireless Communication: - Introduction, Evolution,
Paging. Wireless LAN, Bluetooth, Zig-Bee and Personal Area
networks. Broadband Wireless Access-WiMax Technology. Wireless
Spectrum allocation, Standards.
Cellular System Design Fundamentals: Frequency Reuse, channel
3 assignment strategies, Handoff strategies, Interference and system 11
capacity, trunking and grade off service, improving coverage and
capacity – cell splitting, sectoring, microcells
Introduction to Multiple Access techniques: FDMA, TDMA, Code-
Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Orthogonal Frequency-Division
Multiple Access (OFDMA)
Path loss and shadowing: Free space path loss, Two-Ray model,
Shadowing
Statistical Multipath Channel Models: Time-varying channel impulse
response (Analysis not required) , Narrowband fading, Wideband
fading models, Delay spread and Coherence bandwidth, Doppler
spread and Coherence time, Flat fading versus frequency selective
fading, Slow fading versus fast fading
4 Multi-carrier Modulation: Data transmission using multicarrier
11
modulation for frequency-selective fading channels, overlapping
subchannels, Mitigation of Subcarrier Fading, Discrete
Implementation of multicarrier – OFDM
Diversity: Receiver diversity – selection combining and maximal ratio
combining. Transmitter diversity – Alamouti scheme for 2x2 MIMO.
Equalization: Equalization – Linear and non-linear equalization,
MMSE equalizers.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain information theory measures such as entropy, conditional K2
CO1
entropy, mutual information
CO2 Apply source coding theorem for data compression. K3
CO3 Apply channel coding for error detection and correction K3

CO4 Explain the basic Principle of wireless communication techniques K2

Describe the wireless channel models and analyse the performance of K2

CO5
the modulation techniques for flat fading channels
Identify the advantages of various diversity and equalization K3
CO6
techniques for improving the wireless receiver performance .
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2

CO2 3 2 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 2

CO6 3 2 2 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Cambridge University 1/e, 2005
1 Wireless Communications Andrea Goldsmith Press

Wireless communication:
2 Theodore S. Rappaport Pearson Education 2/e, 2022
Principles and Practice

Elements of Information Joy A Thomas, Thomas

3 Wiley-Interscience 2/e 2006
Theory M Cover
John Wiley and Sons
4 Communication Systems Simon Haykin 4e, 2020
Inc

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Wireless David Tse and Pramod Cambridge University 1st Edition
1 Communication 2005
Viswanath Press

Mobile Communications 2nd Edition

2 Jochen Schiller Pearson
2008
2nd Edition
Wireless Communications Wiley India
3 Andreas F Molish
Publications 2013

Principles of Mobile 4th Edition

4 Communication Gordon L. Stuber Springer
2017

Error Control Coding :

Shu Lin & Daniel J. 2nd Edition
5 Fundamentals and Prentice Hall Inc
Costello. Jr. 2011
Applications
Digital Communication
6 Simon Haykin Wiley India 1/e. 2021
Systems, An Indian Adaptation
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101053
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101053
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee66/preview
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee66/preview
 SEMESTER S6

MICROWAVES & ANTENNAS

PCECT602
Course Code CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Electromagnetics
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(PCECT501)

Course Objectives:

1. To gain knowledge on the basic parameters, types and design of antennas

2. To gain an insight into the principles of operations of microwave sources, hybrid circuits and
semiconductor devices.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Microwaves: Electromagnetic spectrum, Frequency Bands, Features of
microwaves, advantages & disadvantages, Applications, Atmospheric
propagation effects.
Cavity Resonator: TE and TM modes in waveguides (Review only)-
Rectangular Cavity Resonator- Resonance frequency, Q factor, Excitation
and Tuning, Re-entrant cavity.
1 Microwave Hybrid Circuits: E plane Tee, H plane Tee, Hybrid Tee, Hybrid
Ring, Two-hole directional coupler, Isolator, Circulator, Phase shifter, 9
Attenuator
Scattering parameters: Properties of S matrix, S matrix formulation of E
plane Tee, H plane Tee, Magic Tee, Directional coupler.
Microwave Semiconductor Devices: Principle of operation of Tunnel
diode, Gunn diode- Different modes.

Microwave tubes: Types, Structure and Principles of operation of

2
Two Cavity Klystron- Velocity Modulation, Bunching
9
 Reflex Klystron- Velocity Modulation, Power output and efficiency
Traveling Wave Tube Amplifier- Slow wave structures, Helix TWT
amplification process.
Magnetron Oscillator- Cylindrical magnetron, Cyclotron angular
frequency,
Microwave measurements: Measurement of Power, VSWR, frequency,
wavelength, insertion loss, impedance and attenuation; Basic concept of
Network Analyzer and Anechoic chamber
Antennas: Definition, Radiation mechanism, Polarisation, Types,
Applications
Basic antenna parameters: Radiation Pattern, Radiation Power Density,
Radiation Intensity, Radiation resistance, Beamwidth, Directivity, Antenna
Efficiency, Gain, Beam Efficiency, Bandwidth, Input Impedance, Antenna
3 Radiation Efficiency, Effective aperture area, Effective height, Antenna 9
noise temperature
Reciprocity theorem, Helmholtz theorem, Duality Theorem (No proof
required)
Field, directivity and radiation resistance of a short dipole and half wave
dipole (far field derivation).
Antenna arrays: Field of two isotropic point sources, Principle of pattern
multiplication, Array factor, Linear arrays of ‘n’ isotropic point sources
with equal amplitude, Grating lobes, Design of Broadside and End fire
arrays, Phased array principle, Adaptive antenna array principle.
Broad band antennas: Log periodic antenna array – Principle and design
equations
Helical antenna: Design equations, modes
4
Micro strip Rectangular Patch Antennas -Design equations, important 9
feeding methods.
Horn antenna- Types, principles, expressions for E, H and gain (no
derivation required)
Parabolic dish antenna –Principle, Cassegrain feed, expression for E, H and
Gain without derivation,
Mobile phone antenna – Inverted F antenna.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basic mechanism of operation of cavity resonator and K2
CO1
microwave sources
Apply the S parameter theory to obtain the S matrices of various K3
CO2
microwave hybrid circuits
Illustrate the basic concepts of antenna radiation antenna parameters K2
CO3
and their measurement techniques
CO4 Design important broadband antennas and arrays K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Annapurna Das and Sisir
1 Microwave Engineering, McGraw Hill 4th edition
K Das
2 Microwave Devices & Circuits, Samuel Y Liao, Pearson Education 3rd edition
John D.
3 Antennas for all Applications, Tata McGraw Hill 4th edition
Krauss,Marhefka,Khan
Antennas and Wave
4 G S N Raju Pearson Education 3rd edition
Propagation

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electromagnetic Waves and
1 Jordan and Balmain, E Pearson Education 2nd edition
Radiating Systems
Concepts & Applications of Sanjay Kumar Saurabh
2 PHI 2014
Microwave Engineering Shukla
2nd edition
3 Microwave Engineering R.S.Rao PHI
2015
Antennas and Wave
4 R L yadava PHI 2nd edition
Propagation
Microwave Engineering:
5 Fundamentals, Design and Subal Kar Universities press 2022
Applications
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://youtu.be/I2OxOOmE0h8
2 https://youtu.be/NW1NXoM4q5c
3 https://youtu.be/h51mFbIgZRI
4 https://youtu.be/t-AP3ya8Pao
 SEMESTER S6

COMPUTER NETWORKS

Course Code PEECT 631 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. The course aims to expose students to computer networks taking a top-down approach of
viewing from the layer of user applications and zooming into link layer protocols. The
principles of various protocols used in every layer are studied in detail.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Computer Networks Components of computer networks.
Transmission modes in computer communication.

Switching: circuit switching and packet switching. Performance analysis of

packet switched network: Throughput analysis, Delay and loss in packet-
switched networks, Types of delay, Packet loss.

1 Introduction to Queueing models in computer networks. Littles theorem.

9
Networks: Network criteria, physical structures, network models, categories
of networks, Interconnection of Networks.

Layered Architecture: Protocol layering, Internet protocol stack. TCP/IP

protocol suite.

Application Layer: Communication between processes, Web application:

2 HTTP, Message format, Email application: SMTP, Message format, MIME,

POP3, Domain Name System (DNS). 9
 Transport Layer connectionless and connection-oriented protocols. UDP-
Protocols for reliable data transfer: ARQ protocols, stop-and-wait protocol,
alternating-bit protocol, Go-back- N, Selective Repeat. TCP Connection,
segment structure, RTT estimate, Flow control.

Congestion Control General approaches. TCP congestion control.

Congestion control mechanisms and Quality of service.

Network Layer: Datagram versus virtual-circuit network service, Router

architecture, Routing and Forwarding, Static routing and Dynamic routing.

Address Resolution protocols (ARP, RARP)

Subnetting, Classless Routing(CIDR), ICMP.

3 IPv4: Datagram format, Fragmentation and reassembly, addressing, address 10

assignment – manual and DHCP. IPv6- Datagram format, Transitioning from

IPv4 to IPv6, IP security.

Routing Algorithms Link-State (Dijkstra’s) Algorithm, Distance vector

algorithm. Routing in Internet – RIP, OSPF, BGP.

Link Layer Services of link layer, Error detection and correction –

checksum, CRC.

Multiple access protocols – Channel partitioning, random access. ALOHA –

pure and slotted, efficiency, CSMA, CSMA/CA, CSMA/CD. Link layer
4 addressing: MAC address, Ethernet. Wireless Networks IEEE 802.11
8
wireless LAN.

Physical Layer: Guided and unguided transmission media

(Co-axial cable, UTP, STP, Fiber optic cable)

 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Summarize the principles and components of computer K2
CO1 networks, switching, basic concepts of delay analysis and the
layered network architecture.

CO2 Demonstrate protocols and the functions of different layers. K2

Analyse the concept of routing and addressing protocols in the K3

CO3 context of computer networking.

Make use of different physical communication standards in K3

CO4 computer networks.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 3

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Computer Networking: A Top-
Down Approach James F. Kurose, Keith Sixth Edition,
1 Pearson
W. Ross, 2017
Featuring the Internet.

Data Communications and Fourth Edition

2 Behrouz A Forouzan Tata McGraw-Hill
Networking , 2008

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Computer Networks – A Larry L. Peterson, Bruce
1 Elsevier, 2012
Systems Approach, S. Davie,

Communication Networking – A. Kumar, D. Manjunath, Morgan Kauffman

2 2004
An Analytical Approach, J. Kuri, Series

A. S. Tanenbaum, D. J.
3 Computer Networks Pearson Fifth
Wetherall

D. Bertsekas, RG
4 Data Networks Pearson 2nd
Gallager
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs19/preview

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105183/

3 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec21_cs04/preview
 SEMESTER S6

DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Code PEECT 632 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the fundamental concepts of Digital Image Processing and study the various
transforms required for image processing.
2. To study spatial and frequency domain image enhancement and image restoration methods.
3. To understand image compression and segmentation techniques.,
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Digital Image Fundamentals: Image representation, Types of images,
Elements of DIP system, Basic relationship between pixels, Distance
1 Measures, Simple image formation model. Brightness, contrast, hue,
saturation, Mach band effect. Colour image fundamentals-RGB, CMY, HIS 9
models, 2D sampling and quantization.
2D Image transforms: DFT, Properties, Walsh transform, Hadamard
transform, Haar transform, DCT, KL transform and Singular Value
Decomposition.
2
Image Compression: Image compression model, Lossy, lossless
9
compression, Concept of transform coding, JPEG Image compression
standard.
Image Enhancement: Spatial domain methods: Basic Gray Level
Transformations, Histogram Processing, Enhancement Using
3 9
Arithmetic/Logic Operations, Basics of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing spatial
Filters, Sharpening spatial Filters.
 Frequency domain methods: low pass filtering, high pass filtering,
homomorphic filtering.
Image Restoration: Degradation model, Inverse filtering- removal of blur
caused by uniform linear motion, Minimum Mean Square Error (Wiener)
4 Filtering.
9
Image segmentation: Region based approach, clustering , Segmentation
based on thresholding, edge based segmentation, Hough Transform.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain different components of image processing system K2
Analyse the various concepts and mathematical transforms necessary K3
CO2
for image processing
CO3 Illustrate the various schemes of image compression K3

CO4 Analyze the filtering and restoration of images K3

CO5 Describe the basic image segmentation techniques K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 2
CO3 3 3 3 1 2
CO4 3 3 3 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Digital Image Processing Gonzalez Rafel C PEARSON 4TH
S Jayaraman, S
2 Digital Image Processing Esakkirajan, T McGraw Hill Ist
Veerakumar
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Image Processing Kenneth R Castleman

Pearson Education 2/e,2003

Fundamentals of digital image

2 processing Anil K Jain PHI 1988

John Wiley
3 Digital Image Processing Pratt William K 4/e,2007

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_ee133/preview
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105135
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KiJo4-IijL4
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105135/
 SEMESTER S6

SECURE COMMUNICATION

Course Code PEECT 633 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hr. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. Understand and discuss the fundamental concepts of encryption

2. Provide insight into different types of encryption standards
3. Understand basic concepts of Cryptography
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction and Classic Encryption Techniques:-OSI security architecture,
Security attacks – Passive attacks, Active attacks, Security services-
Authentication, Access Control, Data Confidentiality, Data integrity,
Nonrepudiation, Availability service. Model for network security.
1 Symmetric cipher model, Cryptography, Substitution techniques- Hill
Cipher, Transposition Techniques. 9

Finite Fields: -Groups, Rings and Fields, Modular arithmetic, Euclidian

algorithm, Finite Fields of the form GF(p), Polynomial arithmetic
Block Ciphers: - Data Encryption Standard, Block Cipher Principles –
Stream Ciphers and Block Ciphers, Feistel Cipher, Feistel Decryption
2 algorithm, The Data encryption standard, DES Decryption, The AES Cipher, 9
substitute bytes transformation, Shift row transformation, Mix Column
transformation.
Public Key Cryptography: -RSA and Key Management, Principles of public
3 key cryptosystems-Public key cryptosystems, Application for Public key
cryptosystem requirements, Fermat’s theorem, Euler’s Totient Function,
 Euler’s theorem, RSA algorithm, Key management, Distribution of public 9
keys, Publicly available directory, Public key authority, public key
certificates, Distribution of secret keys using public key cryptography.
Message Authentication and Hash Function: - Authentication requirements,
4 Authentication functions- Message Encryption, Public Key Encryption, 9
Message Authentication Code, Hash function

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain network security services and mechanisms and the types of K3
CO1 attacks they are designed for and apply the concepts of modular
arithmetic, Euclidean algorithm, polynomial arithmetic.
Illustrate the principles of modern symmetric ciphers like Data K3
CO2
Encryption Standard and Advanced Encryption Standard.
Outline the concepts of public key cryptography, RSA algorithm, key K2
CO3
distribution, and management for public key systems.
Explain the requirements for authentication and the types of functions K2
CO4
used to produce an authenticator
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Prentice Hall of India 4th

Cryptography and Network
1 William Stallings Edition,
security: principles and practice
2006
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Cryptography and Network
1 security Behrouz A. Forouzan Tata McGraw-Hill 2008

2nd Edition,
David S. Dummit & 2008.
2 Abstract Algebra Wiley India Pvt. Ltd
Richard M Foote

Cryptography, Theory and Chapman & Hall CRC 2nd Edition,

3 Practice Douglas A. Stinson,
Press Company 2005.

Elliptic Curves: Chapman & Hall,

4 Theory and Lawrence C. Washington CRCPress Company, 2008
Cryptography Washington

A course in Number theory and 2008

5 N. Koeblitz
Cryptography

Elementary Number Theory 2nd Edition,

6 with Applications Thomas Koshy Academic Press
2007

Cryptography and network

7 security Tyagi and Yadav Dhanpat Rai & Co 2012

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs91/preview
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102117
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs90/preview
 SEMESTER S6

NANOELECTRONICS

Course Code PEECT634 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the challenges of scaling of devices to Nano-meter scales

2. To design novel transistor devices to reduce the short channel effects and to improve the
performance
3. To understand the Nano-scale quantum transport in Nano electronic devices from atom to
transistor
4. To apply quantum mechanics in materials and quantum devices
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Nano electronics-Review of MOSFETs- Band diagram-
operation-threshold voltage- current-MOSFET parameters.
Challenges going to sub-100 nm MOSFETs- Technological and physical
limits of Nano electronic systems, characteristic lengths
Scaling and short channel effects-Channel length, Oxide layer thickness,
1 tunneling, power density, non-uniform dopant concentration, threshold
voltage scaling, hot electron effects, sub threshold current, velocity 9
saturation, DIBL, channel length modulation.
High-K gate dielectrics- Effective oxide thickness, Effects of high-K gate
dielectrics on MOSFET performance
(Text books 1,2,3)
Novel MOS Devices and Performance Optimization
2
Silicon-on-insulator devices--FD SOI, PD SOI
 Multiple gate MOSFETs--Double gate MOSFETs, FinFETs, Nanowires- 9
Multi gate MOSFET physics-natural length and short channel effects.
Multi Gate MOSFET performance optimization: Fins, Fin Width, Fin
Height and Fin Pitch, Fin Surface Crystal Orientation, Fins on Bulk Silicon,
Nano-wires. Gate Stack, Gate Patterning, Threshold Voltage and Gate Work
function requirements, Poly silicon Gate, Metal Gate, Tunable Work
function metal gate, Mobility and Strain Engineering, Nitride Stress Liners,
Embedded SiGe and SiC Source and Drain, Local Strain from Gate
Electrode, Substrate Strain, Strained Silicon on Insulator.
(Text books 1,4)
Quantum Transport
Atomistic view of electrical Resistance-Energy level diagram- What makes
electrons flow- The quantum of conductance - Potential profile- Coulomb
blockade - Towards Ohm’s law
Schrodinger equation- Method of finite differences – Examples (particle in
a box only)
3 Band structure- 1-D examples- General result with basis- 2-D example 9
Sub bands- Quantum wells, wires, dots, graphene and “carbon nanotubes” --
Density of states-Minimum resistance of a wire
Ballistic to Diffusive Transport-Landauer formula, Landauer-Buttiker
formula. Ballistic and Diffusive transport – transmission.
(Text books 3,5,6. Use MATLAB codes in the text book “Quantum transport
atom to transistor” to illustrate the concepts)
Applications of Quantum mechanics and Quantum devices
Tunneling and applications of quantum mechanics- solution of
Schrodinger equation: Free space, Potential well, tunneling through a
potential barrier. Potential energy profiles for material interfaces,
Applications of tunneling.
Hetero junctions -Modulation-doped hetero junctions- SiGe strained hetero
4
structures- MODFET- Resonant tunnelling-Resonant tunnelling transistor 9
Single electron devices –Coulomb blockade in a Nano capacitor, tunnel
junctions, Double tunnel junction--Coulomb staircase, Single electron
transistor.
Spintronics-Transport of spin, GMR-TMR,applications, Spin Transistor
(Text books 3,6)
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Describe the challenges of scaling of electron devices to Nano meter K2
CO1
scales
Design novel transistor devices to reduce the short channel effects and K3
CO2
improve performance
Outline the Nano scale quantum transport in Nano electronic devices K2
CO3
from atom to transistor
CO4 Apply quantum mechanics in materials and quantum devices K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Fundamentals of Cambridge University Second
1 Yuan Taur, Tak H Ning
Modern VLSI Devices Press, edition 2009
Nanoelectronics and Karl Goser· Peter Springer-Verlag Berlin First Edition,
2
Nanosystems GlÖsekötter· Jan Dienstuhl Heide1berg 2004
Nanotechnology for
J M Martinez Duart, R J First Edition,
3 microelectronics and Elsevier,
Martin Palma, F Agullo Rueda 2006
optoelectronics,
FinFETs and Other First Edition,
4 J-P Colinge Springer
multigate Transistors 2008
Quantum Transport Cambridge University First Edition,
5 Supriyo Datta
Atom to Transistor Press 2005
Fundamentals of nano First Edition
6 George W.Hanson, Pearson Education.
electronics, 2009
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Second
Fundamentals of Carrier Cambridge University
1 Mark Lundstrom Edition,
Transport Press
2000
High Dielectric Constant First
2 materials VLSI MOSFET H R Huff, D C Gilmer, Springer Edition,
Applications, 2004
Nanoelectronics and
Karl Goser· Peter First
nanosystems
3 GlÖsekötter· Jan Springer Edition,
From Transistors to Molecular
Dienstuhl 2004
and Quantum Devices
NANOSCALE
First
TRANSISTORS Mark S. Lundstrom, Jing
4 Springer Edition,
Device Physics, Modeling and Guo
2006
Simulation
First
Fundamentals of Ultra-Thin- Jerry G. Fossum, Vishal Cambridge University
5 Edition,
Body MOSFETs and FinFETs P. Trivedi Press
2013
First
Charles P Poole jr. Frank
6 Introduction to Nanotechnology John Wiley and Sons Edition,
J Owens
2003
Third
Introduction to Quantum David J Griffiths, Darrel Cambridge University
7 Edition,
Mechanics F schroetter Press
2018

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117108047, https://nanohub.org/resources/5328
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117108047
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117107149, https://nanohub.org/resources/8086,,
3
https://nanohub.org/courses/FON1, https://nanohub.org/resources/5306
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117107149, https://nanohub.org/resources/8086
 SEMESTER S6
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
Course Code PEECT636 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PHYSICS Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the concepts of light transmission through optical fibers

2. To introduce the working of optical components and its usage in optical communication
systems
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Optical fiber Communications: Structure of Optical fiber, materials,
General block diagram of optical communication system, Advantages.
Optical fiber waveguides: Principle of light guidance, Numerical Aperture,
V number, Step and Graded index fibers, Single and Multi mode fibers.
1
Transmission Characteristics: Attenuation, Absorption losses, Linear and
9
Non linear scattering losses, bend losses. Dispersion- Intermodal dispersion,
Chromatic dispersion, Dispersion modified fibers, Photonic crystal fibers,
Polarization mode dispersion, Nonlinear effects, Solitons.
Optical fibers and Cables – Fabrication Techniques- Double crucible
method, Outside Vapour phase oxidation, Modified Chemical Vapour
Deposition. Optical Fiber Cables- Single and Multi fiber cables.
2
Optical Fiber Connections: splices, connectors & couplers.
9
Optical Fiber Measurements:- Attenuation and dispersion measurements,
MZ interferometer, Optical Time Domain Reflectometer – Applications
Optical sources: LEDs and LDs, general structures, characteristics,
3 modulators using LEDs and LDs. coupling with fibres, 9
Optical detectors: Quantum efficiency and Responsivity, Structure and
 working of PIN and APD
Optical Receivers: - Direct detection- noise in detectors, SNR, BER
analysis
Coherent detection principles.
Optical Amplifiers: EDFA - Principle, structure and working, Raman
amplifiers
Multiplexing Strategies: OTDM, SCM, OFDM, WDM and Optical CDMA:
concepts, components - couplers, splitters, Add/ Drop multiplexers, Fiber
grating filters, tunable filters.
Optical networks – General description of SONET/SDH
4
Free space optics: Principle of LiFi technology. Visible Light 9
Communication
Other applications of optical fibers: Entertainment, Sensors – Types &
principles

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the structure, fabrication, principle of operation and K2
CO1
classifications of optical fibers
Describe the transmission characteristics and evaluate losses in K2
CO2
optical fiber
Illustrate the working of sources, detectors and optical amplifiers K2
CO3
used in optical communication system
Explainthe concepts of Multiplexing, Optical Networks and Free K2
CO4
Space Communication
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 1 2 2 1 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Optical Fiber Communications Gerd Keiser McGraw Hill 5th/e, 2021
Optical Fiber Communication:
2 John M Senior Pearson Education 3rd/e, 2014
Principles and Practice
3 Fibre Optic Communications Joseph C. Palais Pearson Education 5th/e, 2013
Fibre optic Communication:
4 Mishra and Ugale, Wiley 2019
Systems and Components
Fibre Optic Communications
5 G P Agrawal WILEY 4th Ed
Systems

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fibre Optic Communication:
1 Optical Sanjeev Kumar
University Press 2015
Waveguides, Devices and Raghuwanshi
Applications
2 Optical Communication M Mukunda Rao University Press 2000
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ougKUUM3hJA
2 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/117104127/L01.html
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=seHmi6AMWy4
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4W7hieXDAmc
 SEMESTER S6
OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
Course Code PEECT637 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. Enable the learner to formulate engineering minima/maxima problems as optimization

problems
2. Enable the learner to deploy various constrained and unconstrained optimization algorithms to
obtain the minima/maxima of engineering problems
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Engineering application of Optimization – Statement of an Optimization
problem–Classification, Review of basic calculus concepts –Stationary
points; Functions of single and two variables; Convexity and concavity of
1 functions –Definition of Global and Local optima – Optimality criteria,
Linear programming methods for optimum design – Standard form of linear 9
programming (LP) problem; Canonical form of LP problem; Simplex
Method, Duality, Application of LPP models in engineering
Optimization algorithms for solving unconstrained nonlinear optimization
problems – Search based techniques: Direct search: Fibonacci and golden
2
section search , Hookes and Jeeves , Gradient based method: Newton’s
9
method
Optimization algorithms for solving constrained optimization problems–
direct methods – penalty function methods, barrier method -Optimization of
3 9
function of multiple variables subject to equality constraints; Lagrangian
function– Inequality constrained techniques-KKT conditions-constrained
 steepest descent method

Modern methods of Optimization– Metaheuristic techniques: Genetic

Algorithms – Simulated Annealing – Particle Swarm optimization –Ant
4
colony optimization– : Use of Matlab/Scilab to solve optimization 9
problem

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Formulate an optimization problem to optimize an engineering K2
CO1
application using the principles of basic calculus.
CO2 Apply the Simplex method to solve a linear programming problem K3
Solve the unconstrained optimization problems using gradient based K3
CO3
method.
Apply the various optimization techniques to solve a constrained K3
CO4
optimization problem
Use metaheuristic algorithms to solve constrained and unconstrained K3
CO5
optimization problems
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Engineering Optimization, New Age International 4th Edition
1 S.S RAO
Theory and Practice Publishers ,2012
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Optimization Techniques and John Wiley & Sons
1 Xin-She Yang 2018
Applications with Examples
Optimization for Engineering
2000
2 Design Algorithms and Deb K Prentice Hall India
Examples
Introduction to Optimization Elsevier Academic 2004
3 Arora J
Design Press, New Delhi
Narosa Book
4 Linear Programming Hardley G Distributors Private 2002
Ltd
Genetic Algorithms and Mitsuo Gen, Runwei John Wiley & Sons
5 2002
engineering optimization Cheng
Fourth
Edwin KP Chong,
6 An introduction to optimization John Wiley & Sons Edition,
Stanislaw, H Hak
2013

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
NPTEL
1
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a2QgdDk4Xjw
NPTEL
2
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dPQKltPBLfc
NPTEL
3
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qY-gKL7GxYk
NPTEL
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z_8MpZeMdD4
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FKBgCpJlX48
 SEMESTER S6

IMAGE PROCESSING APPLICATIONS

Course Code PEECT 635 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 5 Exam Hours 2Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PBECT504 Digital

Course Type Theory
Signal Processing

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the fundamental concepts of Digital Image Processing and study the various
transforms required for image processing.
2. To study spatial and frequency domain image enhancement and image restoration
methods.
3. To understand image compression and segmentation techniques.
4. To apply the principles of image processing techniques in real life images.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Digital Image Fundamentals: Image representation, Types of images,
Elements of DIP system, Basic relationship between pixels, Distance

1 Measures, Simple image formation model. Brightness, contrast, hue, 9

saturation, Mach band effect. Colour image fundamentals-RGB, CMY, HIS
models, 2D sampling and quantization.

2D Image transforms: DFT, Properties, Walsh transform, Hadamard

transform, Haar transform, DCT, KL transform and Singular Value
Decomposition.
2 9
Image Compression: Image compression model, Lossy, lossless
compression, Concept of transform coding, JPEG Image compression
standard.
 Image Enhancement: Spatial domain methods: Basic Gray Level
Transformations, Histogram Processing, Enhancement Using
Arithmetic/Logic Operations, Basics of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing spatial
3 Filters, Sharpening spatial Filters. 9

Frequency domain methods: low pass filtering, high pass filtering,

homomorphic filtering.

Image Restoration: Degradation model, Inverse filtering- removal of blur

caused by uniform linear motion, Minimum Mean Square Error (Wiener)
Filtering. Constrained Least square filtering, geometric mean filtering.
4 9
Image segmentation: Region based approach, clustering, Segmentation based
on thresholding, edge based segmentation, Hough Transform.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Students should analyze real world image processing problems and implement using
Matlab or any other programming language.

Evaluation Methods:

1. Experiments using software tools: (10 marks)

2. Course Project applying the principles of image processing techniques:(10 marks)

Project phases: Proposal, Implementation, Testing, Final Report, Presentations and Viva
Voce:

The following topics may be identified for project.

 1. Illustration of different colour image models and its application.

2. Implementation of image transforms and compression algorithms

3. Examine different spatial and frequency domain filtering techniques on real world example
images.

4. Implement image restoration techniques, adjust parameters, and evaluate results

qualitatively and quantitatively

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose
any one full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
each module. which 1 question should be answered. Each
 Total of 8 question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
60
Questions, each Each question carries 9 marks.
carrying 3 marks (4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Compare different colour model representations of image K4
CO1
processing system
Analyse the various concepts and mathematical transforms and K4
CO2
compression schemes necessary for image processing
CO3 Illustrate the various schemes of image filtering K5

CO4 Determine the techniques for restoration of images K5

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Digital Image Processing Gonzalez Rafel C Pearson Education 2009
S Jayaraman, S
2 Digital Image Processing Esakkirajan, T Tata Mc Graw Hill 2015
Veerakumar

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Image Processing Kenneth R Castleman

Pearson Education 2/e,2003

Fundamentals of digital image

2 processing Anil K Jain PHI 1988

3 Digital Image Processing Pratt William K John Wiley 4/e,2007

 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105079
1
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104069
2 same as above

3 same as above

4 same as above
 SEMESTER S6
VLSI CIRCUIT DESIGN
Course Code PBECT604 CIE Marks 60
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
PCECT302 Solid State Devices,
Prerequisites (if any) PCECT303 Analog Circuits, Course Type Theory
PBECT304 Logic Circuit Design

Course Objectives:

1. To provide a comprehensive understanding of VLSI design methodologies, including ASIC

types, SoCs and FPGA devices, design flows, methodologies.
2. To provide a comprehensive understanding of VLSI fabrication techniques.
3. To provide a solid foundation in static CMOS logic design and analysis, layout design and the
application of design rules in layout design.
4. To cover dynamic logic design principles and the design and operation of storage cells.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
VLSI Design Methodologies: Introduction, Moore’s law, ASIC design, Full
custom ASICs, Standard cell based ASICs, Gate array based ASICs, SoCs,
1
FPGA devices, ASIC and FPGA Design flows, Top-Down and Bottom-Up
6
design methodologies, Logical and Physical design.
Fabrication techniques: Material Preparation Purification and Crystal
growth (CZ process), Wafer preparation, Epitaxy - molecular beam
epitaxy, Thermal Oxidation- Dry and Wet oxidation, Diffusion and ion
implantation techniques, Lithography- Photo lithographic sequence,
2
Electron Beam Lithography, Etching, Chemical Vapor Deposition and
8
Physical Vapor Deposition.
MOSFET Fabrication techniques: Twin-Tub fabrication sequence,
Fabrication process flow.
 Static CMOS Logic Design: MOSFET Logic Design - NMOS Inverter
(Static analysis only), basic logic gates, CMOS logic, Static and transient
analysis of CMOS inverter, Static and dynamic power dissipation (detailed
analysis not required), Propagation delays. Realization of logic functions
3 11
with static CMOS logic.
Layout Design and Design rules: Stick Diagram and Design rules-micron
rules and Lambda rules. (definitions only). Layout of CMOS Inverter, two
input NAND and NOR gates.
Pass transistors and Transmission gate logic: Basic concepts, Realisation
of logic gates using pass transistors and complementary pass transistors.
Dynamic logic Design: Pre charge, Logic evaluation, Issues in dynamic
logic, Domino Logic, NP domino logic, Realisation of logic gates circuits
using dynamic logic (NAND and NOR).
4
Sequential Logic and Memory design: Behaviour of bistable elements, 11
CMOS D latch and edge triggered flip flop, Read Only Memory- 4x4 MOS
ROM Cell Arrays (NOR, NAND), Random Access Memory- SRAM-Six
transistor CMOS SRAM cell, DRAM-Three transistor and One transistor
Dynamic Memory Cell.

Suggestion on Project Topics

Sample Projects:
1.Create a standard cell library including basic logic gates, flip-flops, and multiplexers.
Tasks:
● Design cells using schematic capture.
● Perform logic synthesis to verify functionality.
● Simulate the cells using Verilog testbenches.

2. Design and implement a simple RISC processor on an FPGA.

Tasks:
●Design the processor architecture using Verilog.
●Implement and synthesize the design using FPGA tools (e.g., Xilinx Vivado).
●Verify functionality through simulation and hardware testing.
3. Simulate the fabrication process of a MOSFET using TCAD tools.
Tasks:
●Model the different stages of MOSFET fabrication (e.g., oxidation, lithography, doping).
●Analyze the effects of various parameters on device characteristics.
4. Create the layout of CMOS logic gates and perform design rule checking.
Tasks:
● Draw the stick diagrams for a CMOS inverter and two-input NAND/NOR gates.
● Create the corresponding layout using layout tools.
● Verify the layout against micron and lambda design rules.
5. Design and simulate basic memory cells including SRAM and DRAM.
Tasks:
● Design a 4x4 MOS ROM cell array and SRAM/DRAM cells using Verilog.
● Simulate the memory cells to verify their read and write operations.
● Analyze the performance and area of different memory cell designs.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of which 1

module. question should be answered. Each question can have a

● Total of 8 Questions, each maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question carries 6 marks. 40
carrying 2 marks (4x6 = 24 marks)

(8x2 =16 marks)

 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain VLSI design methodologies including ASIC types, SoC and
CO1 K2
FPGA devices, design flows, methodologies.
CO2 Describe VLSI fabrication techniques. K2
Design, analyse and create the layout of static CMOS logic circuits
CO3 K3
adhering to design rules and specifications.
Design and analysis of dynamic logic circuits and the implementation
CO4 K3
of basic storage cells.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 1
CO2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
4/e, Indian
CMOS Digital Integrated Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf
1 Mc Graw Hill Edition,
Circuits- Analysis & Design Leblebici, Chulwoo Kim
2016
2/e, Indian
2 VLSI Technology S.M. SZE Mc Graw Hill Edition,
2017
Prentice Hall; 4th
3 Modern VLSI Design Wayne Wolf 4/e, 2008
edition
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Application Specific Integrated Michael John Sebastian
1 Pearson 1/e, 2002
Circuits Smith

Principles of CMOS VLSI Neil H. E. Weste,

2 Pearson 2/e, 2007
Design -A Systems Perspective Kamran Eshraghian

3 Digital Integrated Circuits Jan M. Rabaey Pearson 2/e, 2016

Design of Analog CMOS McGraw Hill
4 Behzad Razavi 2/e, 2017
Integrated Circuits Education

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092
1
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106103116
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101089
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108107129
3
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101105 Lecture 26 - Layout of Analog Circuit
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108107129
 PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/
Presentation
Lecture Laboratory
Project identification (Progress and Final
delivery Work/
Presentations)
Workshops
Group
Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
discussion
Question
Project Milestone Reviews,
answer Analytical thinking
Feedback,
Sessions/ and Testing
Project reformation (If
Brainstorming self-learning
required)
Sessions
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to
Experts)
5 minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3

Total 30
 1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

● Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

● Research and background understanding
● Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

● Individual contribution to the presentation

● Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

● Active participation and individual contribution

● Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

● Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

● Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
● Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

● Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

● Individual contribution to the presentation
● Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

● Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

● Innovation and originality in the project

Creativity in solutions and approaches

 SEMESTER S6
ENTERTAINMENT ELECTRONICS
Course Code OEECT611 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. To provide broad knowledge on various industry standards, algorithms and technologies used
to carry out digital audio and video broadcasting in infotainment industry.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review of Analog Television: Scanning, Horizontal and Vertical
Synchronization, Color information, Transmission methods. NTSC and PAL
standards. Digital media streaming: Packetized elementary stream of audio-
1 video data, MPEG data stream, MPEG-2 transport stream packet, Accessing 9
a program, scrambled programs, program synchronization. PSI, Additional
(Network information and service description) information in data streams
for set-top boxes.
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB): Satellite TV broadcasting – DVB-S
Parameters, DVB-S Modulator, DVB-S set-top box, DVB-S2. Cable TV
broadcasting – DVB-C Standard, DVB-C Modulator, DVB- C set-top box.
Terrestrial TV broadcasting – DVB-T Standard, DVB-T Modulator, DVB-T
2 Carriers and System Parameters, DVB-T receiver. Broadcasting for 9
Handheld devices – DVB-H Standard DVB tele-text, DVB subtitling system.
Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB): Comparison of DAB with DVB.
Physical layer of DAB. DAB Modulator, DAB Data Structure, DAB single
frequency networks, Data broad casting using DAB.

3 High Definition Video and Audio: Pixel resolution, Comparison with 9

 Standard Definition TV, Review of Discrete Cosine Transforms (DCT),
Video Compression - Quantization levels, Horizontal/Vertical blanking
interval, Vertical Color resolution, DPCM of moving pictures, DCT, Run-
length coding. MPEG-4 Video coding.
Display Technology: Block diagram of video reproduction system in a TV,
Cathode Ray tubes, Basic principle of Plasma displays, LC displays, Light-
4 emitting diode displays, Field emission displays, Organic light emitting 9
device displays. Television of future: Holographic TV, Virtual Reality,
Augmented Reality.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain packetized streaming of digital media happens in the field of
CO1 K2
infotainment industry.
Realise the critical aspects of DVB and DAB standards used for media
CO2 K2
broadcasting
Apply video coding/compression algorithms are used to produce high-
CO3 K3
definition video in MPEG-4 standard
CO4 Describe modern display technologies for video reproduction K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Video and Audio Broadcasting
Technology: A Practical Engineering
1 W. Fischer Springer 2020
Guide (Signals and Communication
Technology)
Understanding Digital Television An
Introduction to DVB Systems with Lars-Ingemar Focal
2 2006
Satellite, Cable, Broadband and Terrestrial Lundström Press,Elsevier
TV,.
Newnes Guide to Televeision and Video
3 K F Ibrahim Newnes 2007
Technology
Jiun-Haw Lee, David
4 Introduction to Flat Panel Displays Wiley 2008
N. Liu, Shin-Tson Wu
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Video and HD
1 C. Poynton Morgan Kaufmann 2012.
Algorithms and Interfaces,"
Digital audio broadcasting:
Wolfgang Hoeg, Thomas
2 principles and applications of Wiley 2009.
Lauterbach
DAB, DAB+ and DMB
3 Introduction to Digital Audio John Watkinson Focal Press 1994.
4 Art of Digital Video, John Watkinson Focal Press 2008
5 Introduction to Digital Video, John Watkinson Focal Press 2001

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=M_nTmRtAD98
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aTDr79yvUus
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=g_ysg46q-jQ
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4BaDaGTUgIY
 SEMESTER S6

COMPUTER NETWORKS

Course Code OEECT 612 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. The course aims to expose students to computer networks taking a top-down approach of
viewing from the layer of user applications and zooming into link layer protocols. The
principles of various protocols used in every layer are studied in detail,
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Computer Networks Components of computer networks.
Transmission modes - serial and parallel transmission, asynchronous,
synchronous, simplex, half duplex, full duplex communication.
Switching: circuit switching and packet switching.
1
Networks: Network criteria, physical structures, network models, categories
9
of networks, Interconnection of Networks.
Delay and loss in packet-switched networks, Types of delay, Packet loss.
Layered Architecture: OSI model
TCP/IP protocol suite: Introduction
Application Layer: Communication between processes, Web application:
HTTP, Message format, Email application: SMTP, Message format, MIME,
2 POP3, Domain Name System (DNS).
Transport Layer connectionless and connection-oriented protocols. UDP- 9
Protocols for reliable data transfer: ARQ
protocols, stop-and-wait protocol, alternating-bit protocol, Go-back- N,
 Selective Repeat. TCP Connection, segment structure, RTT estimate, Flow
control.
Congestion Control General approaches. TCP congestion control.
Network Layer: Datagram versus virtual-circuit network service, Router
architecture, Routing and Forwarding, Static routing and Dynamic routing.
Address Resolution protocols (ARP, RARP)
Subnetting, Classless Routing(CIDR), ICMP.
3 IPv4: Datagram format, Fragmentation and reassembly, addressing, address 10
assignment – manual and DHCP. IPv6- Datagram format, Transitioning from
IPv4 to IPv6, IP security.
Routing Algorithms Link-State (Dijkstra’s) Algorithm, Distance vector
algorithm. Routing in Internet – RIP, OSPF, BGP.
Link Layer Services of link layer, Error detection and correction –
checksum, CRC.
Multiple access protocols – Channel partitioning, random access. ALOHA –
pure and slotted, efficiency, CSMA, CSMA/CA, CSMA/CD. Link layer
4
addressing: MAC address, Ethernet. Wireless Networks IEEE 802.11 8
wireless LAN.
Physical Layer: Guided and unguided transmission media
(Co-axial cable, UTP,STP, Fiber optic cable)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Summarize the principles and components of computer K2
CO1 networks, switching, basic concepts of delay analysis and the
layered network architecture.
CO2 Demonstrate protocols and the functions of different layers. K2

Analyse the concept of routing and addressing protocols in the K3

CO3
context of computer networking.
Make use of different physical communication standards in K3
CO4
computer networks.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 3

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Computer Networking: A Top- Sixth
James F. Kurose, Keith
1 Down Approach Pearson Edition,
W. Ross,
Featuring the Internet. 2017
Fourth
Data Communications and Tata McGraw-Hill
2 Behrouz A Forouzan Edition ,
Networking
2008

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Computer Networks – A Larry L. Peterson, Bruce Morgan Kauffman
1
Systems Approach, S. Davie,
A. Kumar, D. Manjunath,
Communication Networking – Morgan Kauffman
2 J. Kuri,
An Analytical Approach, Series

A. S. Tanenbaum, D. J.
3 Computer Networks Pearson
Wetherall
D. Bertsekas, RG
4 Data Networks Prentice Hall
Gallager

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs19/preview
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105183/
3 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec21_cs04/preview
 SEMESTER S6

BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING

Course Code OEECT613 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0--0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. This course will introduce the various aspects of biomedical engineering and its applications
escribed using engineering principles
2. The student will be able to understand the techniques and uses of modern diagnostic and
therapeutic equipment.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to bio-medical engineering,

Sources of bio-electric potential: Resting and action potential, propagation

of action potentials. Various bioelectric potentials (ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG,
EOG, EGG concept only.)

1 Electrode theory: Nernst equation, Electrode skin interface

9
Bio-potential electrodes: Microelectrodes, skin surface electrodes, needle
electrodes

Bio-potential amplifiers: instrumentation amplifiers, carrier amplifiers,

isolation amplifiers, chopper amplifiers
 Heart and cardiovascular system: electro conduction system of the heart,
ECG lead configurations, Einthoven triangle, Electrocardiography, ECG
machine - block diagram, ECG recording system..

The human nervous system: Neurons, action potential of brain, brain

2
waves, placement of electrodes, EEG recording, evoked potential,
9
Electrical activity of muscles: EMG signal acquisition and
analysis.Myoelectric control system. Electrical stimulation of the muscle
and nerve, Applications of EMG

Instruments for clinical laboratory: Oxymeters, blood cell counter, flame

photometer, Spectrophotometer

Therapeutic Equipments: Principles, block schematic diagram, working and

applications of pacemakers, cardiac defibrillators, heart–lung machine,
3 9
dialyzers, surgical diathermy equipment, ventilators

Biomedical Telemetry system: Components of biotelemetry system,

application of telemetry in medicine, single channel telemetry system for
ECG.

Medical Imaging systems (Basic Principle only): X-ray imaging - X-ray

machine, applications of X-rays in medicine.

Computed Tomograpy: Principle, image reconstruction, scanning system

and applications

4 Ultrasonic imaging systems: Basic pulse echo system, Different types of

9
Ultrasonics systems:, A-Scan, B-Scan, M-Scan, applications, real-time
ultrasonic imaging systems and probes.

Magnetic Resonance Imaging – Basic NMR components, Biological effects

and advantages of NMR imaging
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Outline the basic bioelectric potentials and their implications in KL2

CO1
diagnostics
Summarize the principles used for diagnosis of abnormalities in the KL2
CO2
cardiovascular system
Identify the techniques used for diagnosis and therapy in the KL2
CO3
neuromuscular and myoelectric systems.
Illustrate the principle and working of different types of bio medical KL2
CO4
equipment/devices
CO5 State various diagnostic medical imaging techniques. KL2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
, Handbook of Biomedical Third
1 R. S. Khandpur Tata Mc Graw Hill
Instrumentation edition

Leslie Cromwell, Fred J.

Biomedical Instrumentation 2nd Edition,
2 Weibell, Erich A. , PHI
and Measurement 2004
Pfeiffer,

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 “Medical Instrumentation John G Webster, John Wiley 3rd edition

application and design”,
Introduction to Biomedical
2 J. J. Carr, Pearson Education 4th edition
Equipment Technology

Principle of Biomedical Merrill

3 Instrumentation and Richard Aston, Education/Prentice

Measurement Hall

Introduction to Biomedical Cambridge

4 Barbara Christe 2008
Instrumentation University Press,

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_fD9gOqiBVE
2
http://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/127106134/L16.html
 SEMESTER S6
COMMUNICATION LAB II
Course Code PCECL607 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week
0-0-3-0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 min.
None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. Develop practical skills in microwave and optical communication systems through hands-on
experiments involving microwave sources, fiber optics, and optoelectronic components.
2. Enhance understanding and application of antenna and waveguide theories by designing,
simulating, and measuring various antenna types and waveguide characteristics.

Details of Experiment

Expt. No Experiment
MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS (Minimum four experiments are mandatory)

1 Reflex Klystron Mode Characteristics.

2 GUNN diode characteristics.

3 VSWR and Frequency measurement.

4 Verify the relation between Guide wave length, free space wave length and cut off wave
length for rectangular wave guide.
5 Unknown load impedance measurement using smith chart and verification using
transmission line equation.

6 Measurement of Magic Tee characteristics.

7 Directional Coupler Characteristics.

OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS (Minimum three experiments are mandatory)

1 Setting up of Fiber optic Digital link.

2 Measurement of Numerical Aperture of an Optical fiber

 3 Study of losses in Optical fiber

4 Voltage vs. Current (V-I) characteristics of Laser Diode.

5 Voltage vs. Current (V-I) characteristics of LED.

6 Characteristics of Photodiode

ANTENNA EXPERIMENTS (Minimum three experiments are mandatory)

1 Familiarization of any antenna simulation software

2 Simulation of Dipole Antenna

3 Simulation of Patch Antenna

4 Simulation of Antenna Array.

5 Study of Vector Network Analyzer.

6 Antenna Pattern Measurement

Course Assessment Method (CIE: 50 Marks, ESE 50 Marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work, experiments, Viva and

Internal
Attendance Timely completion of Lab Reports / Record. Total
Exam
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Result with
Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/
valid
Preparatory Execution of work/ Viva
inference/ Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ voce
Quality of
Algorithm Programming
Output
10 15 10 10 5 50
 Mandatory requirements for ESE:

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only
upon submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record.

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Familiarize the basic Microwave components and to analyse a few microwave
measurements and its parameters. K4

CO2 Describe the principles of fiber-optic communications and the different kinds
K2
of losses, signal distortion and other signal degradation factors.
CO3 Design and simulate basic antenna experiments with simulation tools. K6

K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 - - 3

CO2 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 - - 3

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 - - 3

1: Slight (Low),2: Moderate (Medium),3: Substantial (High), : No Correlation

 Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

3rd
1 Microwave Devices and Prentice-Hall Of
Samuel Y. Liao Edition,
Circuits India Pvt. Limited
2008
5th
2 Optical Fiber Communication Gred Keiser Mc Graw Hill Edition,
2013
4th
3 Constantine A. Balanis
Antenna Theory and Design Wiley Publications Edition,
Balanis
2016

Reference Books

Name of the Edition and

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year

1 4th Edition,
Antennas for all Applications John D. Krauss McGraw-Hill
2010

2 2nd Edition,
Modern Antenna Design Thomas A. Milligan Wiley-IEEE Press
2005

3 N.O. Sadiku and S.V. Oxford University 6th Edition,

Principles of Electromagnetics
Kulkarni Press, India 2015

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Sl. No. Link ID

1 https://youtu.be/F07ApLj12sE?si=wN5Al8ERbd52xJ6h

2 https://youtu.be/h51mFbIgZRI?si=GsXQ2sQmaq1HlYui

3 https://www.youtube.com/live/G4DCS2T-hqs?si=3sTAjLEfGR11fNVd
 Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.

● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding

of the theoretical background related to the experiments.

2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.

● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and

troubleshooting skills during the experiments.

● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.

● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.
 Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.

● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing

materials/equipment.

● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the

experiment.

● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality
of program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the
subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER 7
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S7

ADVANCED MOBILE COMMUNICATION

Course Code PEECT741 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To understand basics of 5G
2. To analyze 5G networks for future challenges

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Evolution from 1G to 5G. Analog voice systems in 1G; digital radio systems
in 2G, voice and messaging services, TDMA based GSM, CDMA, 2.5G
(GPRS), 2.75G (EDGE); IMT2000: 3G UMTS, W-CDMA, HSPA, HSPA+,
3G services and data rates; IMT Advanced: 4G, LTE, VoLTE, OFDM,
1
MIMO, LTE Advanced Pro (3GPP Release 13+); IMT2020: 5G,
enhancements in comparison to IMT Advanced. Evolution of LTE
9

Technology to 5G Roadmap.

Basics of 5G. 5G potential and applications; Usage scenarios: enhanced

mobile broadband (eMBB), ultra reliable low latency communications
(URLLC), massive machine type communications (MMTC), D2D
2
communications, V2X communications; Spectrum for 5G, spectrum
9
access/sharing; millimeter Wave communication, channels and
signals/waveforms in 5G, carrier aggregation, small cells, dual connectivity.
5G Network. New Radio (NR), Standalone and non-standalone mode; non-

3 orthogonal multiple access (NOMA); massive MIMO, beam formation, 9

FAPI: PHY API Specification, flexible frame structure, Service Data
 Adaptation Protocol (SDAP); centralized RAN, open RAN; multi-access
edge computing (MEC); software defined networking (SDN), network
function virtualization (NFV); network slicing; restful API for service-based
interface; private networks.

Current state and Challenges ahead. 5G penetration in developed countries;

deployment challenges in low-middle income countries, stronger backhaul
requirements, dynamic spectrum access and usage of unlicensed spectrum,
4
contrasting radio resource requirements; large cell usage: LMLC; possible
9
solutions for connectivity in rural areas (BharatNet, TVWS, Long-range
WiFi, FSO); non-terrestrial fronthaul/backhaul solutions: LEOs, HAP/UAV.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Illustrate the evolution from 1G to 5G K2
CO2 Explain the basics of 5G K2
CO3 Illustrate 5G network K2

CO4 Describe the current state and challenges ahead in 5G K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2 - - - - - - 2
CO1
3 2 - - - - - - 2
CO2
3 2 - - - - - - 2
CO3
3 2 - - - - - - 2
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Erik Dahlman, Johan
4G, LTE-Advanced Pro and 3rd Edition,
1 Skold, and Stefan Academic Press
The Road to 5G 2016
Parkvall
5G NR: Architecture,
Technology, Implementation,
2 Dr. Sassan Ahmadi Academic Press 2019
and Operation of 3GPP New
Radio Standards
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
An Introduction to 5G: The
1st Edition,
1 New Radio, 5G Network and Christopher Cox Wiley
2020
Beyond

5G New Radio Non- Yifei Yuan, Zhifeng

2 CRC Press 2022
Orthogonal Multiple Access Yuan

5G Outlook – Innovations and 1st Edition,

Ramjee Prasad River Publishers
Applications 2016

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ee56/preview
 SEMESTER S7

DEEP LEARNING

Course Code PEECT742 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understand the theoretical basics of neural networks and deep learning

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review of ANN: Perceptrons
Convolutional Neural Networks: Convolution operation , CNN Architecture

1 kernels, padding- Convolutional layers-, Pooling Layers, fully connected

layers. 7
Feature and weight visualization, t-SNE
Loss functions-Mean Squared Error, Cross Entropy
Activation functions, Sigmoid Relu , Softmax
Training CNNs:-Initialization Back-propagation
Optimization algorithms:-SGD, Momentum, Adagrad, RMS Prop, Adam,
Hyper parameter optimization-Learning rate
2
Regularization methods: L1, L2 regularizaton dropout, Data Augmentation,
11
Early stopping batch normalization
Introduction to Transfer learning, feature extraction , fine tuning.
Case study: CNN architectures*: AlexNet, VGG, ResNet,Google net
*(Case study only for practical assignments/microprojects)
Sequence models, Recurrent Neural Networks (RNN): cell structure and
architecture, Training RNN, back propagation through time. Vanishing
3 11
and exploding gradients.
Long Short-Term Memory (LSTM), architecture and training.
 Gated Recurrent Units (GRU), architectture and training.

Introduction to Generative models: parameter estimation, Maximum

Likelyhood Estimation
Auto encoders, latent space variational auto encoders.
GANs : adversarial training. Discriminator , Generator, up sampling,
4
Transformer models, architecture Word embedding, position encoding , 11
attention , training transformer models
Large language models BERT,GPT
( Detailed mathematical treatment not required for this module)

Note:- Assignments/ Micro project should be given for modules 2 ,3 and 4 using standard machine
learning frameworks such as tensorflow/keras/ pytorch. They may also be introduced to GPUs and
standard data sets on hugging face/kaggle

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the basic concepts of neural networks K2
CO2 Solve real world problems usig CNN K2
CO3 Solve real world problems using RNN K2
CO4 Describe the concepts of GAN K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2
CO1
3 3 2 2 2 2
CO2
3 3 2 2 2 2
CO3
3 2 2 2 2
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Edition
Sl. Name of the
Title of the Book Name of the Publisher and
No Author/s
Year
Learning Deep
1 Magnus Ekman Addison -Wesley 2022
Learning
Hands-on Machine
Second
learning with Sc-kit
2 Aurelien Geron Oreilly edition
Learn Keras and
2019
Tensorflow
Astan Zhang and
Dive deep into
3 Zachary and Cambridge university press https://d2l.ai/
machine learning 2019
Alexander semola
Neural Networks for
4 Michael Nielsen http://neuralnetworksanddeeplearning.com/ 2019
deep learning
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ian Goodfellow. Yoshua

1 Deep Learning. Bengio and Aaron MIT Press 2016.

Courville.
Neural Networks and Deep
2 Charu C. Aggarwal. Springer . 2019
Learning: A Textbook..

3 Generative Deep Learning David Foster OReilly 2022

Build a Large

4 Language Model Sebastian Raschka Manning 2023

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://www.cse.iitm.ac.in/~miteshk/CS6910.html

2 https://wiki.pathmind.com/lstm

3 http://colah.github.io/posts/2015-08-Understanding-LSTMs/

4 https://jalammar.github.io/illustrated-transformer/ Jay Almar

 SEMESTER S7

ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

Course Code PEECT 743 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs .30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Introduce the Fundamental concepts and terminology in Robotics and automation

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of Robotics
Automation and Robotics:
Definition and history of robotics.
Differences between automation and robotics.
Applications of robotics in industry and service sectors.
Robot Anatomy:
Basic components: Links, joints, and end effectors.
Structural configurations: Cartesian, cylindrical, spherical, SCARA,
articulated.
Degrees of Freedom (DOF) and their significance.

1 Configurations of Robots:
Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical, Articulated, SCARA. 9
Work Volume and Workspace Analysis:
Definition and importance.
Factors affecting workspace.
Manipulator Kinematics:
Position representation.
Introduction to forward and inverse kinematics.
Homogeneous transformations and their application in robot kinematics.
D-H Notations:
Formulating and solving kinematic equations.
 Control Systems for Robots
Basic Control System Models:
Open-loop and closed-loop control.
Block diagrams and transfer functions.
Robot Motions:
Types of motions: Slew motion, joint-interpolated motion, and straight-
line motion.

2 Path planning and trajectory generation.

Controllers: 9
On/off control.
Proportional (P) control.
Integral (I) control.
Proportional plus integral (PI) control.
Proportional plus derivative (PD) control.
Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control.
Actuation and Feedback Mechanisms
Sensors:
Types of sensors: Position and velocity sensors.
Working principles of encoders and resolvers.
Potentiometers and tachometers.
Actuators:
Electric actuators: DC motors, stepper motors, and servomotors.
Hydraulic actuators.

3 Pneumatic actuators. 9
Power Transmission Devices:
Gears, belts, chains.
Leadscrews and ball screws.
End Effectors:
Types of grippers: Mechanical, vacuum, magnetic.
Design considerations for grippers.
Methods of Power and Control Signal Transmission:
Electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic transmission.
Industrial Applications and Work Cell Design
Material Handling:
4
General considerations for material handling with robots, Material transfer 9
applications.
 Pick and Place Operations:
Techniques and applications, Integration with production lines.
Palletizing and Related Operations:
Methods and case studies.
Manufacturing Processes:
Die casting, plastic molding, forging.
Machining operations, stamping press operations.
Role of robots in automation of these processes.
Robot Cell Layouts:
Design considerations for multiple robots and machine interfaces.
Examples of typical robot cell layouts.
Work Cell Control:
Interlocks and safety mechanisms.
Error detection and recovery strategies.
Work Cell Controllers:
Types and functions of work cell controllers.
Integration with other control systems.
Cycle Time Analysis:
Techniques for analyzing and optimizing robot cycle times.
Factors affecting cycle time and productivity.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Describe the basic components, structural configurations, and degrees
CO1 K2
of freedom (DOF) of robots.
Apply forward and inverse kinematics for different types of robotic
CO2 K3
manipulators.
Implement various types of controllers and explain their impact on
CO3 K2
robot motion control
Identify and compare different types of sensors and actuators used in
CO4 K2
robotic systems
Describe the basics of robot cell layouts considering multiple robots
CO5 K2
and machine interfaces.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 2 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 3

CO5 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
"Introduction to Robotics:
1 John J. Craig PHI FIRST
Mechanics and Control"
Mark W. Spong, Seth
2 Robot Modeling and Control Hutchinson, and M. WILEY FIRST
Vidyasagar
3 Industrial Robotics Groover MP Mc Graw Hill 1987

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Robotics fundamental concepts Oxford university

1 Ashitava Ghoshal 2006
& analysis press

2 Introduction to Robotics John G Craig PHI 2005

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me76/preview

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/107106090
 SEMESTER S7

CODING THEORY

Course Code PEECT744 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PCECT 601 Advanced
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
Communication Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To impart the knowledge of current error control coding techniques

used in digital communication networks.
2. To impart the knowledge of encoding and decoding of various error control codes

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Algebra-Overview of Groups, Rings , Finite Fields -Binary
field arithmetic, Primitive elements (3hrs)
Irreducible and Primitive Polynomials, Conjugate elements and Minimal
1 9
Polynomials- Field extension-Construction of Finite Fields from Polynomial
rings (3hrs)
Vector spaces – Subspace and Dual spaces-matrices(3hrs)
Error Control Coding – Relevance of error control codes in Communication
System, concepts of Code rate, Hamming Distance, Minimum Distance,
Error detecting and correcting capability. (3hrs)

2 Review on LBC-Generator matrix, Parity Check Matrix. Maximum 9

Likelihood Decoding-syndrome decoding (3hrs)
Simple bounds on block codes - Singleton bound, Hamming Bound, Gilbert-
Varshamov bound. Maximum-distance-separable (MDS) codes. (3hrs)
Basic concepts of cyclic codes – Polynomial and matrix description.
Interrelation between polynomial and matrix view point (2 hrs)

3 Encoding: Non-systematic and systematic encoding, syndrome decoding- 9

complete decoding of cyclic codes(4hrs)
Hamming Codes-properties-Examples (1 hr)
 BCH codes, Reed-Solomon Codes (Properties and encoding only) (2hrs)

Review on Convolution Codes- Systematic Encoders, Decoding of

Convolution Codes –Viterbi algorithm, Turbo Codes, Encoding parallel
concatenated codes. (3hrs)
Low Density Parity Codes, Construction, Tanner Graphs, Message passing

4 decoding. Example of message passing decoding over binary erasure 9

channels. Message passing of LLR and decoding over AWGN channels.
(3hrs)
Polar Codes – Introduction, polarization of BEC channels, Polar transform
and frozen bits. LDPC and Polar codes in 5G. (3hrs)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain various algebraic structures used in coding theory K2
CO2 Explain the error detection and correction capabilities of linear codes K2
CO3 Apply linear block codes to detect and correct errors. K3
Use algebraic techniques to construct efficient codes with reduced
CO4 K3
structural complexity

CO5 Apply convolutional code for error detection correction K3

Illustrate modern error correcting codes like Turbo codes, LDOC code
CO6 K2
and polar codes
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2
CO6 3 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year
Error Control Coding :
Shu Lin & Daniel J.
1 Fundamentals and Prentice Hall Inc 2nd Edition
Costello. Jr.
Applications
John Wiley and Sons
2 Communication Systems Simon Haykin 4e
Inc

Modern Coding Theory T. Richardson, R. Cambridge University

3
Urbanke Press
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Principles of digital Cambridge University
1 RG Gallager
communication Press
Cambrdige University
2 Introduction to Coding Theory Ron M Roth
Press
A Brief Introduction to Polar
3 H. Pfister Lec. Notes
Codes
Polar Codes: A Non-Trivial
4 O. Gazi Springer 2018
Approach to Channel Coding
LDPC and Polar Codes in 5G
5 A. Thangaraj
Standard, NPTEL Course

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101053
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=f8RvFlr5wRk
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ee49/preview
4 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/108102117/L01.html
 SEMESTER S7

ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Course Code PEECT746 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Digital Signal
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
Processing

Course Objectives:

1. To gain an in-depth knowledge of processing of digital signals and their application to

modern world problems
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Multi-rate system and filter banks :
Basic multi-rate operations: up sampling and down sampling , time domain
and frequency domain analysis, Need for anti aliasing and anti imaging
filters. Noble identities.
Type 1 and Type 2 polyphase decomposition, Efficient structures for
1
decimation and interpolation filters. Uniform filter banks and its
9
implementation using polyphase decomposition. QMF Filter Bank-
conditions for perfect reconstruction, polyphase implementation. Design of
perfect reconstruction M- channel Filter Banks. Applications of multirate
systems.
Wavelet transform:
Time Frequency Trade off in signal analysis, Heisenberg's uncertainty
principle.
Short Time Fourier transform-Filter Bank representation. Continuous

2 Wavelet Transform- Admissibility condition. Time-frequency diagrams for

the STFT and the wavelet transform 9
Discrete Wavelet Transform- Haar Scaling and Wavelet Functions, Haar
analysis of signals, concept of nested space. Orthonormal Wavelet Analysis-
Filter bank interpretation. Applications of wavelet transform.
 Power spectrum estimation- Rational power spectra representation,
Relationships Between the Filter Parameters and the Autocorrelation

3 Sequence, Parametric method of power spectrum estimation-Yule Walker 9

equations, Non parametric method of power spectrum estimation-
Periodogram, Averaging periodogram.
Linear prediction filters- Forward and backward predictors, lattice filter
structure, relationship between linear filter coefficients and reflection
coefficients, Normal equations for optimum filter design. Adaptive filters-
4
Weiner filter design, Adaptive filters for adaptive channel equalization, 9
adaptive noise cancellation and Linear Predictive Coding of Speech Signals,
Steepest descent algorithm, LMS algorithm.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Classify continuous and discrete time signals and systems based on
CO1 K2
their properties and perform basic operations on signals.
Determine the stability and causality of LTI systems using convolution
CO2 K3
operations.
Analyze signals in frequency domain using Laplace, Fourier and z-
CO3 K3
transforms and examine the properties of transforms.
Interpret the use of various transforms to analyze continuous and
CO4 discrete time LTI systems. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 1

CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Alan V. Oppenheim
1 Signals and Systems Pearson Education 2/e, 2015
and Alan Willsky

2 Signals and Systems Simon Haykin John Wiley 2/e, 2021

 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
3/e, 2013
1 Signals and Systems Anand Kumar PHI

Principles of Signal Processing Oxford University 2/e, 2009

2 B P. Lathi
& Linear systems Press
Signals & Systems - 4/e, 2013
3 Rodger E. Ziemer Pearson
Continuous and Discrete
Brooks/Cole Publishing
Analog and Digital Signal 2/e, 2013
4 Ashok Ambardar Company
Processing

Signals and systems - Cambridge University

5 Shaila Dinkar Apte 1/e, 2016
Principles and Applications Press

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104100

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104100

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104100

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108104100
 SEMESTER S7

CRYPTOGRAPHY

Course Code PEECT 747 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce fundamental concepts of symmetric and asymmetric cipher models.

2. To understand the basics of authentication.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to cryptology: Stream and block ciphers- secret and public
key cryptography.
Introduction to Complexity of Algorithm- P, NP, NP-Complete classes.

1 Number theory: Primes, divisibility, linear diaphantine equations,

congruences, system of linear congruences, Wilson theorem, Fermat‘s little 10
theorem, Euler's theorem. Multiplicative functions, Primitive roots,
Quadratic congruences- quadratic residues, Legrende symbol.
Review of algebraic structures: groups, rings, finite fields, polynomial
rings over finite field.
2 8
Symmetric Ciphers: Affine cipher, Hill cipher, Enciphering matrices. Data
Encryption standard (DES), Advanced Encryption standard (AES).
Public key cryptography: One-way functions, RSA, Discrete Log, Diffie-
Helman Key Exchange system, Digital signature standards. Knapsack Crypto
3 9
system, Zero-knowledge protocols.
Elliptic curves and elliptic curve cryptosystems
Cryptanalysis: Primality testing- pseudo primes- the rho method.
Cryptanalysis methods: linear, differential, higher order differential,
4 9
quadratic. Factoring Algorithms- Trial Division, Dixon's Algorithm,
Quadratic Sieve.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the principles of number theory and abstract algebra in K3
CO1
cryptology.

CO2 Design and analyze various symmetric ciphers K3

CO3 Design and analyze various asymmetric ciphers K3

Apply the mathematical techniques for the cryptanalysis of symmetric K3
CO4
and asymmetric ciphers.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
A Course in Number Theory Neal Koblitz: Springer 2/e, 2012
1
and Cryptography
Elementary Number Theory Thomas Koshy Elsevier India 2/e, 2007
2
with Applications
Handbook of Applied Menezes, Paul C. CRC Press 5/e, 2010
3
Cryptography V, Scott A. Vanstone

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Number Theory in Science and MR Schroeder Springer 5th Edition,
1
Communication 2009
Cryptography: Theory and Douglas R. Stinson Chapman and 3rd Edition,
2
Practice Hall/CRC 2006
Guide to Elliptic Curve Hankerson, D.J., Springer 2004
3 Cryptography Menezes, A., Vanstone,
S.A.
Advanced Engineering Merle C. Potter, David C. Wiley 10th
4 Mathematics Wiggert Edition,
2012
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105162

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105162

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105162

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105162
 SEMESTER S7

DEEP LEARNING TECHNIQUES

Course Code PEECT 745 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To provide foundational knowledge of advanced neural network architectures like CNNs,

RNNs, and generative models, with practical insights into their training, optimization, and
applications in transfer learning and sequence modeling.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review of ANN: Perceptrons
Convolutional Neural Networks: Convolution operation , CNN Architecture

1 kernels, padding- Convolutional layers-, Pooling Layers, fully connected

layers. 7
Feature and weight visualization, t-SNE
Loss functions-Mean Squared Error, Cross Entropy
Activation functions, Sigmoid Relu , Softmax
Training CNNs:-Initialization Back-propagation
Optimization algorithms:-SGD, Momentum, Adagrad, RMS Prop, Adam,
Hyper parameter optimization-Learning rate
2
Regularization methods: L1, L2 regularizaton dropout, Data Augmentation,
10
Early stopping batch normalization
Introduction to Transfer learning, feature extraction , fine tuning.
Case study: CNN architectures*: AlexNet, VGG, ResNet,Google net
*(Case study only for practical assignments/microprojects)
Sequence models, Recurrent Neural Networks (RNN): cell structure and
3 9
architecture, Training RNN, back propagation through time. Vanishing
 and exploding gradients.
Long Short-Term Memory (LSTM), architecture and training.
Gated Recurrent Units (GRU), architectture and training.
Introduction to Generative models: parameter estimation, Maximum
Likelyhood Estimation
Auto encoders, latent space variational auto encoders.
GANs : adversarial training. Discriminator , Generator, up sampling,
4
Transformer models, architecture Word embedding, position encoding , 10
attention , training transformer models
Large language models BERT,GPT
( Detailed mathematical treatment not required for this module)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Evaluation Methods:

1: Practical Experiments Using Design and Analysis Tools (10 marks)

Students will perform specific experiments using tools like TensorFlow, PyTorch, or Keras.
Each experiment will focus on implementing and analyzing different types of neural network
architectures and techniques.
2: Course Project (10 marks)

Comprehensive project involving design, implementation, and analysis of neural network

models. Project phases: Proposal, Design, Implementation, Testing, Final Report,
Presentation, and Viva Voce.

Sample Experiments:

Experiment 1: Building a Convolutional Neural Network (CNN)

 Objective: Design and train a CNN for image classification.

 Tools: TensorFlow/Keras or PyTorch.
 Steps:
 Implement a CNN with convolutional layers, pooling layers, and fully connected layers.
 Train the model on a dataset like CIFAR-10.
 Analyze the model's performance using evaluation metrics like accuracy and loss curves.

Experiment 2: Visualizing Feature Maps and Weight Distributions

 Objective: Visualize the internal workings of a neural network.

 Tools: TensorFlow/Keras or PyTorch, Matplotlib.
 Steps:
 Train a CNN on a simple dataset.
 Visualize the feature maps after each convolutional layer.
 Use t-SNE for feature visualization and analyze the distribution of weights.

Experiment 3: Transfer Learning and Fine-Tuning

 Objective: Use a pre-trained model for a new task.

 Tools: TensorFlow/Keras or PyTorch.
 Steps:
 Use a pre-trained model like VGG or ResNet.
 Fine-tune the model on a new dataset.
 Analyze the performance improvement compared to training from scratch.

Experiment 4: Exploring Recurrent Neural Networks

 Objective:Implement an RNN to predict time-series data(eg. Word prediction) .

 Tools: TensorFlow/Keras or PyTorch.
 Steps:
 Build an RNN model with LSTM or GRU cells..
 Train the model on a time-series dataset
 Visualize and interpret the model's predictions.

Sample Project Topics:

1. Designing a Real-Time Object Detection System Using YOLO

2. Development of a Neural Network for Sentiment Analysis on Social Media

3. Implementing a GAN for Image-to-Image Translation

4. Building a Speech Recognition System Using RNNs and LSTMs

5. Creating a Transfer Learning Model for Medical Image Classification

Criteria for Evaluation: Lab Experiments (10 marks)

Understanding of Concepts (3 marks)

 Demonstrates a thorough understanding of the theoretical concepts related to the experiments.

 Correctly explains the purpose and expected outcomes.

Implementation and Accuracy (3 marks)

 Correctly implements the neural network models using appropriate tools.

 Ensures the design functions as expected with minimal errors.

Analysis and Problem-Solving (2 marks)

 Effectively analyzes the model performance and identifies issues.

 Demonstrates problem-solving skills in addressing challenges encountered during experiments.

Documentation and Reporting (1 mark)

 Provides detailed documentation of the experimental setup, process, and outcomes.

 Includes visualizations, code snippets, and analysis of results.
Presentation and Communication (1 mark)

 Clearly presents the experiments and their results.

 Able to answer questions and explain design choices.

Course Project (10 marks)

Project Proposal and Planning (2 marks)

 Submits a well-defined project proposal outlining objectives, methodology, and expected

outcomes.
 Demonstrates thorough planning and a clear timeline for the project.

Design and Implementation (3 marks)

 Implements the project design accurately using appropriate tools and techniques.
 The design is functional and meets the project objectives.

Innovation and Creativity (2 marks)

 Introduces innovative ideas or unique approaches in the design and implementation.

 Demonstrates creativity in solving problems or optimizing designs.

Analysis and Testing (2 marks)

 Effectively analyzes the project design to identify and address any issues.
 Conducts thorough testing to verify the functionality and performance of the model.

Final Report and Presentation (1 mark)

 Submits a comprehensive final report detailing the project, including objectives, design,
methodology, analysis, and results.
 Clearly presents the project and its outcomes, and effectively communicates the key points.
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
 Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions. Each 60
each carrying 3 marks question carries 9 marks.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Analyze and differentiate between various neural network components. K3

Develop and implement strategies for training neural networks K4

CO2
Apply and Integrate Sequence and Generative Models K3
CO3
Evaluate the effectiveness of transformer models, including BERT and K5
CO4
GPT, and assess the impact of transfer learning techniquess
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2
CO1
3 3 2 2 2 2
CO2
3 3 2 2 2 2
CO3
3 2 2 2 2
CO4
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Learning Deep Learning Magnus Ekman Addison -Wesley 2022
Hands-on Machine learning Second
2 with Sc-kit Learn Keras and Aurelien Geron Oreilly edition
Tensorflow 2019

Dive deep into machine Astan Zhang and Zachary Cambridge university
3
learning and Alexander semola press https://d2l.ai/ 2019

Neural Networks for deep http://neuralnetworksa

4 Michael Nielsen 2019
learning nddeeplearning.com/

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ian Goodfellow. Yoshua
1 Deep Learning. Bengio and Aaron MIT Press 2016.
Courville.
Neural Networks and Deep
2 Charu C. Aggarwal. Springer . 2019
Learning: A Textbook..

3 Generative Deep Learning David Foster OReilly 2022

Build a Large Language

4 Sebastian Raschka Manning 2023
Model
Deep Learning with Python
5 Francois chollet Manning 2021
second Edition

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://www.cse.iitm.ac.in/~miteshk/CS6910.html

2 https://cs231n.github.io/
https://wiki.pathmind.com/lstm
3
http://colah.github.io/posts/2015-08-Understanding-LSTMs/
4 https://jalammar.github.io/illustrated-transformer/ Jay Almar
 SEMESTER S7

SATELLITE AND RADAR COMMUNICATION

Course Code PCECT751 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To analyze operational principles of satellite communication systems

2. To apply radar techniques to detect and track targets

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Satellite orbit and orbital equations, Kepler‟s laws of planetary motion,
locating satellite in the orbit, locating satellite with respect to earth, Look
angle calculation, coverage angle and slant range, orbital perturbations,
satellite launching, orbital effects in communication subsystem
1
performance.
Satellite subsystems, Attitude and orbit control system, Telemetry tracking
9

command and monitoring, power system, communication subsystem,

satellite antennas.
Satellite link design- Basic link analysis, Interference analysis, terrestrial
interference, Intermodulation interference, inter-symbol interference and
rain induced attenuation, uplink power control, system availability,
2
system design for link without frequency reuse and system design for link
9
with frequency reuse.

Basics of Radar: Introduction, Range, Radar Waveforms, Simple form of

Radar Equation, Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies
3 and Applications, Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum Detectable 9
Signal, Receiver Noise, Modified Radar Range Equation
 CW and Frequency Modulated Radar: Doppler Effect, CW Radar – Block
Diagram, Applications of CW radar.
FM-CW Radar: FM-CW Radar, Range and Doppler Measurement, Block

4 Diagram and Characteristics (Approaching/ Receding Targets), FM-CW

altimeter, Multiple Frequency CW Radar. 9
MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: Introduction, Principle. MTI versus Pulse
Doppler Radar. Tracking Radar: various techniques of Tracking with Radar

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Illustrate the principles of satellite communication K2

CO2 Design and analysis of satellite link K3

CO3 Illustrate Radar Fundamentals like Radar Equation and Applications. K2

CO4 Compare various types of Radars and tracking techniques K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 - - - - - - 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Timothy Pratt, Jeremy 3rd Edition,
1 Satellite Communications Wiley
Allnutt 2021
2nd
2 Introduction to Radar Systems Merrill I. Skolnik Tata McGraw-Hill Edition,
2017
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd
Digital Satellite McGraw-Hill
1 Tri, T.Ha, Edition,
Communications Education
2017
2nd
Satellite Communications Systems Pearson
2 Pritchard, Edition,
Engineering Education
2006
Radar: Principles, Technology, 1st Edition,
3 Byron Edde Pearson
Applications 2004
Simon Kinsley and Shaun 1st Edition
4 Understanding Radar Systems John Wiley& Sons
Quegan 1999

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105131/

2 Same as above

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105154/

4 Same as above
 SEMESTER S7

INTERNET OF THINGS

Course Code PEECT 752 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. This course aims to introduce IoT fundamentals.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to IoT technology: Definitions of IoT, Characteristics of IoT
devices – power, computational constraints, IoT Architectural view –
Middleware based architecture, Service oriented architecture, M2M
Communication and IoT, Typical application areas of IoT technology (case
1
studies of at least four domains) - Energy management and Smart grid, IoT
9
for Home, Cities, Environment monitoring, Agriculture, Supply chain and
customer monitoring

Components of IoT technology: Identification/Addressing - Electronic

Product Codes, RFID, ubiquitous code, IPv4, IPv6. Sensors and Actuators*.
IoT Hardware**, IoT Software – overview of Operating systems, Firmware,
2
Middle ware, Application software used in IoT. Connectivity for IoT devices
9
– characteristics.

Communication technologies for IoT : Zigbee - key features, architecture,

limitations, Bluetooth technology - bluetooth stack, piconet, scatternet,

3 limitations, Bluetooth Low Energy (key features, architecture, limitations), 9

Wifi (IEEE 802.11) technology – key features, limitations, Cellular
technology – GSM, 3G, 4GLTE (overview), features, limitations, LoRa
 technology – features, LoRaWAN architecture, 6LoWPAN – features,
protocol stack, Narrow Band (NB- IoT) – features, applications, Sigfox –
features, applications

IoT Data Management : Storage technologies for IoT hardware – Volatile,

Non-volatile, Embedded (MTP/OTP), external flash (NAND/NOR), DRAM,
eflash, UFS, eMMC (overview of technologies). Cloud and IoT, Cloud
computing – architecture, advantages of cloud computing, Software as a

4 Service (SaaS), Platform as a Service (PaaS), Infrastructure as a Service

9
(IaaS). Case study of commercial cloud computing platforms like - Microsoft
Azure IoT Suite, Google Cloud's IoT Platform, IBM Watson IoT Platform.
IoT analytics

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Tota
Part A Part B
l
● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain in a concise manner the architecture of IoT K2

CO2 Identify various hardware and software components used in IoT K3

CO3 Describe the various communication technologies and interfaces in IoT K2

Describe the usage of modern technologies like cloud computing for K2
CO4
data management in IoT
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Internet of Things : McGraw Hill (India) 2nd
1 Architecture and Design Rajkamal Private Limited.
Principles” edition,2022

Orient Blackswan 1st

“Internet of Things (A Hands- Vijay Madisetti and
2 Private Limited - New Edition,2015
on- Approach)” Arshdeep Bahga
Delhi
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
. Internet of things: A survey
IEEE Communications
1 on enabling technologies, Al-Fuqaha 2015
Surveys & Tutorials
protocols, and applications
The MIT Press
March 20,
2 The Internet of Things Samuel Greengard Essential Knowledge
2015
series Paperback
The Internet of Things:
Converging Technologies for Ovidu Vermesan and
3 River Publishers 1st Edition, 2013
Smart Environments and Peter Friess
Integrated Ecosystems
. Internet of Things - From
Peter Friess, Ovidiu 1st
4 Research and Innovation to River Publishers
Vermesan Edition,2014
Market Deployment

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://youtu.be/WUYAjxnwjU4?si=s58W-NKMrEQMaJ8m
1
https://youtu.be/BXDxYh1EV2w?si=8oFtQB9vycC_c-t2
https://youtu.be/z3VEZPwl5gA?si=tNuzG_By-KBU3ks_
2 https://youtu.be/SXz0XR68dwE?si=1tVN1g9FQcGp87li
https://youtu.be/TvzgzO6xKrY?si=gYzJstW51MTNsgKj
https://youtu.be/qko-f1VDhCM?si=0tWM_OHS395ESV_w
3 https://youtu.be/d9QfVpCG00Y?si=qeHk8tPg_torr2yX
https://youtu.be/1zQ8wbBozqI?si=7vOSHMt8OT3nQINO
https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLE7VH8RC_N3bpVn-
4 e8QzOAHziEgmjQ2qE&si=rr5Fpuew5q9_Y4qg
 SEMESTER S7

REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

Course Code PEECT 753 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Introduce Real Time Operating Systems, its basic structure, building blocks and various
operations
2. Summarize the different scheduling algorithms used in RTOS.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to Real-Time Systems

Overview of Real-Time Systems: Definition and types of real-time systems,

Hard vs. soft real-time systems. Basic Concepts: Real-time tasks and their
characteristics, Task scheduling, Timing constraints and requirements.
RTOS Architectures: Monolithic kernels vs. microkernels. RTOS
1 examples: commercial vs Open RTOS and their comparison, examples.
Inter-Process Communication (IPC): Shared memory, Message passing. 9

RTOS Environment Setup: Installation and setup of an RTOS on a

microcontroller (e.g., ARM Cortex-M), Task Creation and Management:
Writing simple tasks, Task states and transitions, Scheduling and Context
Switching: Implementing basic scheduling algorithms, Demonstrating
context switching with example tasks
Real-Time Scheduling and Synchronization
2
Real-Time Scheduling Algorithms: Fixed-priority scheduling (Rate- 9
 Monotonic, Deadline-Monotonic), Dynamic priority scheduling (Earliest
Deadline First), Priority based preemption, Round Robin, Task
Synchronization: Mutual exclusion, Priority inversion and inheritance
Inter-Task Communication: Semaphores, Mutexes, Event flags

Implementing Scheduling Algorithms: Practical implementation of

scheduling, Synchronization Mechanisms: Practical implementation of
semaphores and mutexes in task synchronization, Demonstrating priority
inversion and its mitigation: Real-Time Task Communication:
Implementing inter-task communication using queues and mailboxes

Real-Time System Design and Analysis

System Design Principles: Modular design, Time-triggered vs. event-

triggered systems, Worst-Case Execution Time (WCET) Analysis:
Techniques for WCET estimation, Timing analysis, Reliability and Fault
3 Tolerance: Redundancy, Error detection and recovery. 9

Designing a Real-Time System: Case study: Designing a real-time control

system, WCET Analysis Tools: Using tools for WCET analysis and timing
verification, Implementing Fault Tolerance: Practical implementation of
redundancy and error recovery mechanism

Real-Time Operating System Services and Applications

Real-Time Operating System Services: Memory management, I/O

management. Real-Time Middleware: Middleware services for real-time
systems, Case Studies and Applications: Automotive systems, Aerospace
and defense, Medical devices
4
9
Memory Management in RTOS: Implementing dynamic memory
allocation, Real-Time Middleware Implementation: Developing
middleware components for a real-time application Case Study
Implementation: Implementing a real-time system for a specific application
(e.g., real-time data acquisition)
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the fundamental concepts and characteristics of real-time K1, K2
CO1 systems.

Analyze and implement real-time scheduling algorithms and K4

CO2
techniques.
Conduct worst-case execution time (WCET) analysis for real-time K3, K4
CO3
tasks.
Utilize RTOS services and middleware for developing real-time K3,K4
CO4
applications
Develop practical real-time applications in various domains such as K3, K4
CO5
automotive, aerospace, and medical devices.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
CreateSpace
Real-Time Operating Systems
1 Jim Cooling Independent 1st 2018
Book 1: The Theory
Publishing Platform
Real-Time Systems: Theory Rajib Mall
2 Pearson Education 2007
and Practice
Real-Time Systems: Design
3 Principles for Distributed Hermann Kopetz Springer 2nd 2011
Embedded Applications
Embedded Systems: Real-Time CreateSpace
4 Operating Systems for Arm Jonathan W. Valvano Independent 3rd, 2017
Cortex-M Microcontrollers Publishing Platform

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
C. M. Krishna, Kang G.
1 Real-Time Systems McGraw-Hill 2010
Shin,
2 Real-Time Systems Jane W. S. Liu Pearson Education 2009
Real-Time Systems Design and Philip A. Laplante,
3 Wiley 2012
Analysis Seppo J. Ovaska,

E-Man Press
Embedded Systems with ARM LLC
4 Cortex-M Microcontrollers in Yifeng Zhu 3rd , 2017
Assembly Language and C
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
https://elearn.nptel.ac.in/shop/iit-workshops/completed/lab-workshop-on-embedded-
1 rtos/?v=c86ee0d9d7ed
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs98/preview

https://elearn.nptel.ac.in/shop/iit-workshops/completed/lab-workshop-on-embedded-
2
rtos/?v=c86ee0d9d7ed

https://elearn.nptel.ac.in/shop/nptel/real-time-operating-system/?v=c86ee0d9d7ed
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs98/preview

https://elearn.nptel.ac.in/shop/iit-workshops/completed/lab-workshop-on-embedded-
4
rtos/?v=c86ee0d9d7ed
 SEMESTER S7

MIXED SIGNAL CIRCUITS

Course Code PEECT754 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

To gain knowledge about analysis and design of various analog and digital CMOS circuits

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
CMOS Amplifiers
MOS small signal model:
CMOS Amplifiers: Common source amplifier with resistive and active
loads, Common source amplifier with source degeneration, Common gate
1
and Common drain amplifier (only voltage gain and input and output
9
impedances of the circuits).
Cascode Amplifier: Cascoded amplifier with cascade loads Folded cascode
Amplifier.
CMOS Differential Amplifiers
MOS Current Mirror: Basic circuit, PMOS and NMOS current mirrors
Simple and Cascode current mirror circuits.
2
CMOS Differential Amplifier: Differential Amplifier with resistive, current
9
source and current mirror loads, MOS telescopic cascode amplifier (only
voltage gain and input and output impedance of the circuits)
CMOS Operational Amplifier
Two Stage Operational Amplifiers
Frequency compensation of OPAMPS
3 9
Miller compensation.
Band gap References- Supply Independent Biasing,
Temperature independent references –band gap reference
 Data Converters: DAC specifications, ADC specifications
DAC Architecture - Resistor String, R-2R Ladder Networks, Current
Steering, Charge Scaling, cyclic and
4
Pipeline types. 9
ADC Architecture- Flash type, The Successive approximation type and
oversampling ADCs.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain various Single stage Amplifiers with different types of loads K2
CO2 Explain Differential Amplifiers & Current Mirrors K2
CO3 Apply the knowledge of amplifiers in the design of two stage OPAMP K3
CO4 Illustrate the concept of frequency compensation in OPAMP K2

CO5 Describe the specifications and architectures of data converter circuits K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3

CO2 3 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Design of Analog CMOS
1 Behzad Razavi McGraw-Hill 2/e, 2002
Integrated Circuits

CMOS: Circuits Design, Prentice Hall India,

2 Baker, Li, Boyce, 2000
Layout and Simulation,

Oxford University
3 Microelectronic Circuits Sedra & Smith 6/e,2017
Press

Reference Books
 Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Phillip E. Allen, Douglas Oxford University
1 CMOS Analog Circuit Design, 3/e
R. Holbery Press

Fundamentals of
2 Behzad Razavi Wiley student Edition 2014
Microelectronics

Analysis and Design of Analog Meyer Gray , Hurst,

3 Wiley 5/e, 2009
Integrated Circuits Lewis

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

2 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

3 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

4 Switching Circuits and Logic Design by Prof. Indranil Sengupta Lectures 47-51
 SEMESTER S7

SPEECH AND AUDIO PROCESSING

Course Code PEECT 756 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs 30 Min

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. To impart the basic concepts of speech signal processing

2. To familiarize the auditory mechanism and speech perception

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Speech Production: - Acoustic theory of speech production- -Source/Filter
model - Pitch, Formant, Spectrogram-- Discrete model for speech
1 production, Articulatory Phonetics -Acoustic Phonetics- Basic speech units
9
and their classification.

Short-Time Speech Analysis, Windowing, STFT, spectra of windows- Wide

and narrow band spectrogram -Time domain parameters (Short time energy,
short time zero crossing Rate, ACF). Frequency domain parameters-Filter
2
bank analysis. STFT Analysis. Prosody of speech. MFCC-computation, LPC 9
Model, Pitch and Formant Estimation.

Speech Enhancement: Spectral subtraction and Filtering, Harmonic

filtering, parametric resynthesis. Speaker Recognition: Speaker verification
3 9
and speaker identification- log-likelihood. Machine learning models in
Speaker Recognition. Language identification: implicit and explicit models.
Signal Processing models of audio perception: Basic anatomy of hearing
System: Basilar membrane behaviour. Sound perception: Auditory Filter
4
Banks, Critical Band Structure, Absolute Threshold of Hearing, Masking- 9
Simultaneous Masking, Temporal Masking. Models of speech perception
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
To describe the fundamental concepts, principles, and theories of K1
CO1
speech production

CO2 To analyse the speech signal in the time and frequency domain K2

CO3 To apply speech processing concepts in real-world applications K3

To describe the fundamental concepts, principles, and theories of K1
CO4
hearing mechanism
To develop applications by combining concepts of speech production K3
CO5
and hearing mechanism
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3

CO2 3 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 3

CO5 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Speech Communications:
1 Human and Machine, 2nd Douglas O'Shaughnessy Wiley-IEEE Press 2nd edition
Edition
Discrete-Time Speech Signal
Prentice-Hall Signal
2 Processing: Principles and Thomas F. Quatieri 2001
Processing Series
Practice

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Processing of
1 Rabinar Pearson 2003
Speech Signals

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
Speech and Audio Processing 1: Introduction to Speech Processing - Professor E. Ambikairajah
1
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xjzm7S__kBU
Speech Analysis - Professor E. Ambikairajah
2
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Y_mSQ7tTlvQ&t=38s
Speech and Audio Processing 1: Introduction to Speech Processing - Professor E. Ambikairajah
3
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xjzm7S__kBU
4 Video Links available on hearing anatomy
 SEMESTER S7

MICROWAVE DEVICES & CIRCUITS

Course Code PEECT 757 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Microwave &
Prerequisites (if any) Antennas Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the principles of active and passive microwave semiconductor devices,

components, microwave sources and amplifiers used in microwave communication systems,
analysis of microwave networks and microwave integrated circuits.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Limitation of conventional solid state devices at Microwave. Microwave
generation and amplification.
Structure, Operation, Power output and efficiency of IMPATT and
TRAPATT diodes

1 Bipolar transistors – biasing, FET – biasing, MESFET – Structure,

Operation. 9
Microwave amplifiers and oscillators – Amplifiers – Gain and stability,
Single stage transistor amplifier design. Oscillator design – One port
negative resistance oscillators.
Microwave Network Analysis – Equivalent voltages and currents,
Impedance and Admittance matrices, Scattering matrix, The transmission
matrix.
2
Signal flow graphs. Impedance matching and tuning – Matching with
9
lumped elements, Single stub tuning, Double stub tuning. Quarter wave
transformer, Theory of small reflections.
Microwave filters – Periodic structures – Analysis of infinite periodic
3 9
structures and terminated periodic structures
 Filter design by image parameter method – Constant k, m-derived and
composite.
Filter design by insertion loss method. Filter transformation and
implementation
Introduction to MICSs:-Technology of hybrid MICs, monolithic MICs.
Comparison of both MICs. Planar transmission lines such as strip line,
microstripline, and slot line.
Distributed and lumped elements of integrated circuits -capacitors,
4
inductors, resistors, terminations, attenuators, resonators and 9
discontinuities.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Describe the basic principles of Microwave solid state diodes, K2
CO1
transistors, generators and amplifiers.

CO2 Analyse Microwave Networks using signal flow graphs K3

CO3 Design microwave filters by different methods K3

CO4 Illustrate the basic concepts of Monolithic Integrated Circuits K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2

CO4 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Microwave Engineering,, David M. Pozar, Wiley India 4/e,2012.

, Foundation of Microwave Wiley India,

2 Robert E. Collin 2/e,2012.
Engineering,,

3 Microwave Devices & Circuits Samuel Y. Liao, Pearson 3/e

4 Microwave Integrated Circuits Yoshihiro Konishi Taylor & Francis

 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Stripline-like Transmission Bharathi Bhat and Shiban New Age
1 2007
Lines for MIC K. Koul International (P) Ltd
., Microwave Integrated
2 I. Kneppo, J. Fabian, et al BSP, India 2006.
Circuits,,
Passive RF and Microwave
3 Leo Maloratsky, Elsevier, 2006
Integrated Circuits

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee34/preview

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/101/108101112/

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105138/

4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ee34/preview
 SEMESTER S 7

MIXED SIGNAL CIRCUIT DESIGN

Course Code PEECT755 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5 Exam Hours 2 Hrs.30 Min.

Solid State Devices,
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
Network Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To gain indepth knowledge about analysis and design of various analog and digital CMOS
circuits

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
CMOS Amplifiers
MOS small signal model:
CMOS Amplifiers: Common source amplifier with resistive and
active loads, Common source amplifier with source degeneration,
1 9
Common gate and Common drain amplifier (only voltage gain and
input and output impedances of the circuits).
Cascode Amplifier: Cascoded amplifier with cascade loads Folded
cascode Amplifier.
CMOS Differential Amplifiers
MOS Current Mirror: Basic circuit, PMOS and NMOS current
mirrors Simple and Cascode current mirror circuits.

2 CMOS Differential Amplifier: Differential Amplifier with resistive, 9

current source and current mirror loads, MOS telescopic cascode
amplifier (only voltage gain and input and output impedance of the
circuits)
CMOS Operational Amplifier Two Stage Operational Amplifiers
Frequency compensation of OPAMPS Miller compensation.
3 9
Band gap References- Supply Independent Biasing,
Temperature independent references –band gap reference
 Data Converters: DAC specifications, ADC specifications
DAC Architecture - Resistor String, R-2R Ladder Networks, Current

4 Steering, Charge Scaling, cyclic and Pipeline types. 9

ADC Architecture- Flash type, The Successive approximation type and
oversampling ADCs.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Evaluation Methods:

1. Experiments Using Design and Analysis Tools: (10 marks)

Students can perform specific experiments using tools QUCS, KiCad or PSPICE or
LT Spice or CADENCE etc.
Each experiment can focus on designing and simulating different types of circuits

2. Course Project:
Comprehensive project involving design, modeling, and analysis of a Mixed Signal
Circuit. (10 marks)
Project phases: Proposal, Design, Implementation, Testing, Final Report.Presentations
and Viva Voce:
Students present their projects and experiments, explaining design choices,
methodologies, and results.
Viva voce to assess understanding and ability to answer related questions.

The following topics may be identified for Assignments/ Miniproject

1. Simulation of a MOSFET Amplifier Circuits
2. Simulation of a Differential Amplifier Circuits
3. Design and Simulation of OPAMP
4. Design and Simulation of ADCs, DACs

Criteria for Evaluation: Experiments (10 marks)

1. Understanding of Concepts (3 marks)

a. Demonstrates a clear understanding of the theoretical concepts related to the
experiment.
b. Correctly explains the purpose and expected outcomes of the experiment.
2. Implementation and Accuracy (3 marks)
a. Correctly implements the design using appropriate tools.
b. The design functions as expected without errors.
3. Analysis and Problem-Solving (2 marks)
a. Effectively analyse the design to identify and resolve issues.
b. Demonstrates problem-solving skills in addressing any encountered
challenges.
4. Documentation and Reporting (1 mark)
a. Provides clear and concise documentation of the steps and processes followed.
b. The report includes diagrams, code snippets, and simulation results.
5. Presentation and Communication (1 mark)
a. Clearly presents the experiment and its results.
b. Able to answer questions and explain the design choices.

Criteria for Evaluation: Course Project (10 marks)

1. Project Proposal and Planning (2 marks)

a. Submits a well-defined project proposal outlining objectives, methodology,
and expected outcomes.
b. Demonstrates thorough planning and a clear timeline for the project.
2. Design and Implementation (3 marks)
a. Implements the project design accurately using appropriate tools and
 techniques.
b. The design is functional and meets the project objectives.
3. Innovation and Creativity (2 marks)
a. Introduces innovative ideas or unique approaches in the design and
implementation.
b. Demonstrates creativity in solving problems or optimizing designs.
4. Analysis and Testing (2 marks)
a. Effectively analyzes the project design to identify and address any issues.
b. Conducts thorough testing to verify the functionality and performance of the
design.
5. Final Report and Presentation (1 mark)
a. Submits a comprehensive final report detailing the project, including
objectives, design, methodology, analysis, and results.
b. Clearly presents the project and its outcomes, and effectively communicates
the key points.

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each
● Total of 8 Questions, question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions. 60
each carrying 3 marks Each question carries 9 marks.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Analyze the effect of different types of loads on the performance of K4
CO1
various MOS Amplifiers

CO2 Apply the knowledge of amplifiers in the design of two stage OPAMP K3

CO3 Demonstrate the concept of frequency compensation in OPAMP K3

CO4 Implement various types of data converter circuits K3

Design and Implement amplifiers, OPAMPs, ADCs, DACs etc. with K3

CO5
given specifications
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2
CO1 3 2 2

CO2 3 2 2

CO3 3 2 2

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 2 3 2 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Design of Analog CMOS
1 Behzad Razavi McGraw-Hill 2/e, 2002
Integrated Circuits
CMOS: Circuits Design, Prentice Hall India,
2 Baker, Li, Boyce, 2000
Layout and Simulation,
3 Microelectronic Circuits Sedra & Smith Oxford University Press 6/e,2017
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Phillip E. Allen, Douglas Oxford University

1 CMOS Analog Circuit Design, 3/e
R. Holbery Press

Fundamentals of
2 Behzad Razavi Wiley student Edition 2014
Microelectronics

Analysis and Design of Analog Meyer Gray , Hurst,

3 Wiley 5/e, 2009
Integrated Circuits Lewis

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

2 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

3 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

4 Switching Circuits and Logic Design by Prof. Indranil Sengupta Lectures 47-51
 SEMESTER S7

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION

Course Code OEECT721 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PHYSICS Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the concepts of light transmission through optical fibers

2. To introduce the working of optical components and its usage in optical communication
systems
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Optical fiber Communications: Structure of Optical fiber, materials,
General block diagram of optical communication system, Advantages.
Optical fiber waveguides: Principle of light guidance, Numerical Aperture,
V number, Step and Graded index fibers, Single and Multi mode fibers.
1
Transmission Characteristics: Attenuation, Absorption losses, Linear and
9
Non linear scattering losses, bend losses. Dispersion- Intermodal dispersion,
Chromatic dispersion, Dispersion modified fibers, Photonic crystal fibers,
Polarization mode dispersion, Nonlinear effects, Solitons.
Optical fibers and Cables – Fabrication Techniques- Double crucible
method, Outside Vapour phase oxidation, Modified Chemical Vapour
Deposition. Optical Fiber Cables- Single and Multi fiber cables.
2
Optical Fiber Connections: splices, connectors & couplers.
9
Optical Fiber Measurements:- Attenuation and dispersion measurements,
MZ interferometer, Optical Time Domain Reflectometer – Applications
Optical sources: LEDs and LDs, general structures, characteristics,
modulators using LEDs and LDs. coupling with fibres,

3 Optical detectors: Quantum efficiency and Responsivity, Structure and 9

working of PIN and APD
Optical Receivers: - Direct detection- noise in detectors, SNR, BER
 analysis
Coherent detection principles.
Optical Amplifiers: EDFA - Principle, structure and working, Raman
amplifiers
Multiplexing Strategies: OTDM, SCM, OFDM, WDM and Optical CDMA:
concepts, components - couplers, splitters, Add/ Drop multiplexers, Fiber
grating filters, tunable filters.
Optical networks – General description of SONET/SDH
4
Free space optics: Principle of LiFi technology. Visible Light 9
Communication
Other applications of optical fibers: Entertainment, Sensors – Types &
principles

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the structure, fabrication, principle of operation and classifications
CO1 K2
of optical fibers

CO2 Describe the transmission characteristics and evaluate losses in optical fiber K2
Explain the working of sources, detectors and optical amplifiers used in
CO3 K2
optical communication system
Describe the concepts of Multiplexing, Optical Networks and Free Space
CO4 K2
Communication
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1

CO3 3 1 2 1 1 1

CO4 3 1 2 2 1 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Optical Fiber
1 Gerd Keiser McGraw Hill 5th/e, 2021
Communications
Optical Fiber
3rd/e,
2 Communication: Principles John M Senior Pearson Education
2014
and Practice

3 Fibre Optic Communications Joseph C. Palais Pearson Education 5th/e, 2013

Fibre optic Communication:

4 Mishra and Ugale, Wiley 2019
Systems and Components
Fibre Optic Communications
5 G P Agrawal WILEY 4th Ed
Systems
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Fibre Optic Communication:

Optical Sanjeev Kumar
1 University Press 2015
Waveguides, Devices and Raghuwanshi

Applications

2 Optical Communication M Mukunda Rao University Press 2000

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ougKUUM3hJA

2 https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/117104127/L01.html

3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=seHmi6AMWy4

4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4W7hieXDAmc
 SEMESTER S7

DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Code OEECT 722 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the fundamental concepts of Digital Image Processing and study the various
transforms required for image processing.
2. To study spatial and frequency domain image enhancement and image restoration methods.
3. To understand image compression and segmentation techniques.,

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Digital Image Fundamentals: Image representation, Types of images,
Elements of DIP system, Basic relationship between pixels, Distance

1 Measures, Simple image formation model. Brightness, contrast, hue,

saturation, Mach band effect. Colour image fundamentals-RGB, CMY, HIS 9
models, 2D sampling and quantization.
2D Image transforms: DFT, Properties, Walsh transform, Hadamard
transform, Haar transform, DCT, KL transform and Singular Value
Decomposition.
2
Image Compression: Image compression model, Lossy, lossless
9
compression, Concept of transform coding, JPEG Image compression
standard.
Image Enhancement: Spatial domain methods: Basic Gray Level
Transformations, Histogram Processing, Enhancement Using
Arithmetic/Logic Operations, Basics of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing spatial
3 9
Filters, Sharpening spatial Filters.
Frequency domain methods: low pass filtering, high pass filtering,
homomorphic filtering.
 Image Restoration: Degradation model, Inverse filtering- removal of blur
caused by uniform linear motion, Minimum Mean Square Error (Wiener)

4 Filtering.
9
Image segmentation: Region based approach, clustering , Segmentation
based on thresholding, edge based segmentation, Hough Transform.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain different components of image processing system K2
Analyse the various concepts and mathematical transforms necessary for
CO2 K3
image processing

CO3 Illustrate the various schemes of image compression K3

Analyze the filtering and restoration of images
CO4 K3
Describe the basic image segmentation techniques
CO5 K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 1 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 2

CO3 3 3 3 1 2

CO4 3 3 3 1 2

CO5 3 3 3 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Image Processing Gonzalez Rafel C PEARSON 4TH

S Jayaraman, S
McGraw Hill Ist
2 Digital Image Processing Esakkirajan, T
Veerakumar
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Image Processing Kenneth R Castleman

Pearson Education 2/e,2003

Fundamentals of digital image

2 processing Anil K Jain PHI 1988

John Wiley
3 Digital Image Processing Pratt William K 4/e,2007

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_ee133/preview

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105135

3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KiJo4-IijL4

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105135/
 SEMESTER S7

OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

Course Code OEECT723 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Enable the learner to formulate engineering minima/maxima problems as optimization

problems
2. Enable the learner to deploy various constrained and unconstrained optimization algorithms to
obtain the minima/maxima of engineering problems

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Engineering application of Optimization – Statement of an Optimization

problem–Classification, Review of basic calculus concepts –Stationary
points; Functions of single and two variables; Convexity and concavity of

1 functions –Definition of Global and Local optima – Optimality criteria,

Linear programming methods for optimum design – Standard form of linear 9
programming (LP) problem; Canonical form of LP problem; Simplex
Method, Duality, Application of LPP models in engineering

Optimization algorithms for solving unconstrained nonlinear optimization

problems – Search based techniques: Direct search: Fibonacci and golden
2
section search , Hookes and Jeeves , Gradient based method: Newton’s
9
method
 Optimization algorithms for solving constrained optimization problems–
direct methods – penalty function methods, barrier method -Optimization of

3 function of multiple variables subject to equality constraints; Lagrangian 9

function– Inequality constrained techniques-KKT conditions-constrained
steepest descent method

Modern methods of Optimization– Metaheuristic techniques: Genetic

4 Algorithms – Simulated Annealing – Particle Swarm optimization –Ant

colony optimization– : Use of Matlab/Scilab to solve optimization problem 9

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Formulate an optimization problem to optimize an engineering K2
CO1
application using the principles of basic calculus.

CO2 Apply the Simplex method to solve a linear programming problem K3

Solve the unconstrained optimization problems using gradient based K3

CO3
method.
Apply the various optimization techniques to solve a constrained K3
CO4
optimization problem
Use metaheuristic algorithms to solve constrained and unconstrained K2
CO5
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
3 2 2 2
CO1
3 3 3 2
CO2
3 2 3 2
CO3
3 2 3 2
CO4
3 2 3 2
CO5
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Engineering Optimization, New Age International 4th Edition

1 S.S RAO
Theory and Practice Publishers ,2012
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Optimization Techniques and John Wiley & Sons
1 Xin-She Yang 2018
Applications with Examples

Optimization for Engineering 2000

2 Design Algorithms and Deb K Prentice Hall India
Examples

Introduction to Optimization Elsevier Academic 2004

3 Arora J
Design Press, New Delhi

Narosa Book
4 Linear Programming Hardley G Distributors Private 2002
Ltd

Genetic Algorithms and Mitsuo Gen, Runwei John Wiley & Sons
5 2002
engineering optimization Cheng

Fourth
Edwin KP Chong, John Wiley & Sons
An introduction to optimization Edition,
6
Stanislaw, H Hak
2013

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
NPTEL
1
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a2QgdDk4Xjw
NPTEL
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dPQKltPBLfc

NPTEL
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qY-gKL7GxYk

NPTEL
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z_8MpZeMdD4
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FKBgCpJlX48
 SEMESTER 8

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S8

WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS

Course Code PEECT861 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. The course aims to expose students to computer networks taking a top-down

approach of viewing from the layer of user applications and zooming into link
layer protocols.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction, application, and challenges of wireless sensor networks
(WSN).

Wireless LANS and PANS: Introduction, Fundamentals of WLANs, IEEE

802.11 standard, HIPERLAN standard, Bluetooth,
1
Wireless WANs and MANs : Cellular architecture, 2G/3G/4G/5G Cellular
9
Networks, WLL, IEEE 802.15 Standard: Physical layer, Data link layer,
MAC protocols

Wireless Internet

Network architecture: Sensor network scenarios, Optimization goals and

figures of merit, Design principles of WSNs, Service interfaces of WSNs.
2 Communication Protocols: Physical layer: Wireless channel and
communication fundamentals, Physical layer and transceiver design 9

considerations in WSNs.
 Mobile ad hoc networks and wireless sensor networks, Field buses and
wireless sensor networks, Enabling technologies for wireless sensor
networks.
3 9
Mobile IP, TCP in wireless domain, TCP-BUS and Ad Hoc TCP, Split TCP,
WAP, optimising Web over wireless.

WSN architecture: Single node architecture: Hardware components, Energy

consumption of sensor nodes, Low power wireless sensor networks, Routing
4 protocols-LEACH, PEGASIS and RPL, Operating systems and execution
9
environments, Case Study: TinyOS and nesC 50 Other examples.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the principles of wireless networks concepts and their K2
CO1 standards.

Illustrate various concepts on the basics of wireless sensor K2

CO2 networks and mobile adhoc networks.

CO3 Develop single node wireless sensor architecture K3

Analyse the network architecture and the communication K4

CO4 protocols of wireless sensor networks

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Siva Ram Murthy C. and 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education
1 Architectures and Protocols Manoj B. S. 2017

Protocols And Architectures for Holger Karl & Andreas 2nd Edition,
John Wiley
2 Wireless Sensor Networks Willig 2017
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Wireless Communications and 2nd Edition,
1 William Stallings Prentice Hall
Networks 2017

Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Waltenegus Dargie , John Wiley & Sons 2nd Edition,
2 Networks - Theory and Practice Christian Poellabauer Publications 2019

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105160

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105160

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105160

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105160
 SEMESTER S8
RF ENGINEERING
Course Code PEECT862 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Microwaves
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
&Antennas
Course Objectives:

1. To learn the analysis, design and simulation of Radio Frequency (RF) Circuits and
Components for wireless communication systems.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
RF circuit introduction - Importance of radio frequency design, RF
behaviour of resistors inductors and capacitors
Planar Transmission Lines – Micro strip lines and Strip lines –
1 Constructional Features 9
Impedance Matching Networks-Design of Matching Circuits using Lumped
Elements, Single Stub tuning, Quarter-Wave Transformers, Multi-Section
Transformer – Binomial Transformer
RF Filter Design- Filter Design using insertion loss technique –Active RF
components- Bipolar Junction Transistor – Construction-Functionality-
Power Frequency Limitations of High Frequency transistors.
GaAs devices - Familiarization of RF Field Effect Transistors and High
Electron Mobility Transistors–Constructional details
2 11
RF circuit measurements and characterization- Using Vector Network
analyser – S parameter, Reflection Coefficient and Insertion Loss
Measurement
Modelling and Simulation of RF circuits using – Open source or Commercial
EM Simulation Software
Amplifier design using S-parameters - Characteristics of Amplifier Power
3 8
Relations, Stability Considerations – Stability Circles, Tests for
 Unconditional Stability
High frequency amplifier design – Single stage amplifier Design – Design
for maximum gain, Low noise amplifier design
Basic oscillator model -Feedback oscillator design—Negative Resistance
Oscillator- Dielectric Resonator Oscillator - YIG Tuned Oscillator
4 8
Mixer - Basic characteristics – Single-Ended Mixer Design, Single-balanced
and double-balanced mixers

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):
Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basic idea about RF networks and working of RF filter
CO1 K2
circuits
Describe the behaviour of RF components and application of Network
CO2 K2
analyser in parameter measurement
CO3 Apply the principle of RF networks in the designing of RF amplifiers, K3
Apply the principle of RF networks in the designing RF Oscillators and
CO4 K3
Mixers
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
RF Circuit Design: Theory & Pearson Education
1 Ludwig, Reinhold 2/e., 2000.
Applications India
Microwave and RF design of
2 Pozar, David M. John Wiley & Sons 2/e, 2011
wireless systems
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Advanced RF & microwave
Radmanesh, Matthew
1 circuit design: the ultimate Author House, 2/e, 2017
M
guide to superior design.
McGraw-Hill
2 Secrets of RF circuit design Carr, Joseph J. 2/e, 2001
Education.
Radio-frequency and
3 microwave communication Misra, Devendra K John Wiley & Sons, 2/e, 2019
circuits: analysis and design.
Radio Frequency & 2nd
Mathew M. Pearson Education
4 Microwave Electronics Edition,
Radmanesh Asia,
2017
2nd
RF/microwave circuit design Rohde, Ulrich L., and
5 John Wiley & Sons, Edition,
for wireless applications. David P. Newkirk
2017
Davis, W. Alan, and 2nd
Radio frequency circuit John
6 Krishna Kumar Edition,
design. Wiley,
Agarwal. 2017
Christopher, Bowick, 2nd
7
RF Circuit Design. Ajluni Cheryl, and Newnes, Edition,
Blyler John. 2015
2nd
Design of RF and microwave Artech
8 Abrie, Pieter LD. Edition,
amplifiers and oscillators. House
2019

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_ee36/preview
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105189/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/102/117102012/
 SEMESTER S8
RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS
Course Code PEECT 863 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)
Course Objectives:

1. To develop in-depth knowledge for the various renewable energy resources available
at a location and assessments of its potential, using tools and techniques.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Renewable Energy (RE)Sources: World energy scenario,
Over view of conventional energy sources, their limitation, need of
renewable energy, potential & development of renewable energy sources,
1
Renewable energy in India, An overview of types of renewable energy
9
systems - Wind power, Hydropower (micro and mini), Solar energy,
Biomass, Bio-fuel, Geothermal Heat energy, Pros and cons; Applications.
Solar Energy: Introduction to photovoltaic (PV) systems - Principle of PV
conversion; Commercial solar cell, Thin film PV device fabrication -
LPCVD, APCVD, PECVD; Tandem Solar cell fabrication; Solar power
extraction using PV-Cells, I-V Characteristics, PV-Inverters without D.C. to
2
D.C. converters, stand alone and grid collected PV systems, Grid interfacing-
9
with isolation, without isolation, Maximum power point tracking-
Methods(MPPT), PV-Inverters with D.C. to D.C. converters-on low
frequency side and high frequency side with isolation, without isolation.
Wind Energy: Sources and potentials, of Wind Intensity, Topography,
General Classification of Wind Turbines-Rotor Turbines, Multiple-Blade
3 Turbines, Drag Turbines, Lifting Turbines, System Toroidal Rotor Amplifier 9
Platform (TARP)–Wind amplified rotor platform (WARP), Generators and
speed control used in wind power energy: Fixed speed with capacitor bank,
 Rotor resistance control, SCIG and DFIG, Synchronous Generator-external
magnetized, Synchronous Generator-permanent magnets.
Electronic conversion systems application to renewable energy generation
systems: Basic schemes and functional advantages, Power control and
management systems for grid integration, island detection systems,
synchronizing with the grid; Issues in integration of converter based sources;
4
Network voltage management; Power quality management and Frequency 9
management; Influence of PV/WECS on system transient response.
Introduction to grid connectivity of RE systems, smart grid and emerging
technologies, operating principles and models of smart gird components.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the need, importance and scope of various Non-Conventional K2
CO1
sources of energy
Outline the concepts and technologies related to renewable energy K2
CO2
systems using wind and Solar-PV
CO3 Illustrate the integration of smart grid with renewable energy systems K3

CO4 Explain the concept of distribution management system. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 1
CO2 2
CO3 2 1
CO4 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Solar Energy: Principles of Nayak J. K. and
1 Tata McGraw Hill 3/e. 2008
Thermal Collection and Storage Sukhatme S. P.
Power Electronics: Circuits,
2 Muhannad H. R. Pearson Prentice Hall 4/e, 2017
Devices and Applications
Smart Grid Technology and Nick Jenkins, Janaka
3 Wiley India Ltd 1/e, 2015
Applications Ekanayake [et al.]
Design of Smart Power Grid
4 Ali Keyhani Wiley-IEEE Press 1/e, 2016
Renewable Energy Systems
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Handbook of renewable energy Ahmed F Zobaa and
1 World Scientific 1/e, 2011
technology Ramesh Bansal
Solar Energy: Fundamental and Garg H. P. and Prakash
2 Tata McGraw Hill 2/e, 2015
Application S.
The Smart Grid: Enabling
3 Energy Efficiency and Demand Gellings C. W. CRC Press 1/e, 2009
Response
Grid Converters for
Teodorescu R. Liserre M.
4 Photovoltaic and wind Power Wiley – IEEE press 1/e, 2011
Rodriguez P.
Systems,

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ph33/preview
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103103206
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ch27/preview
 SEMESTER S8

CYBER SECURITY

Course Code PEECT864 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To understand the fundamental concepts of cybersecurity, including various types of cyber

threats and attacks.
2. To learn and apply basic security measures, mechanisms, and best practices to protect
systems and data from threats
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Security basics – Aspects of network security –
Attacks – Different types – Hackers – Crackers – Common intrusion
techniques –Trojan Horse, Virus, Worm. Security threats - Sources
1 of security threats- Motives - Target Assets and vulnerabilities – 9
Consequences of threats- E-mail threats - Web-threats - Intruders and
Hackers, Insider threats, Cybercrimes.

Security services and mechanisms, OS Security – Protection

Mechanisms –Authentication & Access control – Discretionary and
Mandatory access control
2 Firewall- Need for firewall, Characteristics, Types of firewall, 9
Firewall Basing,
Intrusion Detection System- Types, Goals of IDS, IDS strengths and
Limitations.
 Cryptography: Basic Encryption & Decryption – Transposition &
substitution ciphers – Caesar substitution – Polyalphabetic
substitutions – Crypt analysis – Symmetric key algorithms – Feistel
Networks – Confusion – Diffusion – DES Algorithm – Strength of
3 9
DES – Comparison & important features of modern symmetric key
algorithms – Public key cryptosystems – The RSA Algorithm –
Diffie Hellman key exchange – comparison of RSA & DES – Message
Authentication & Hash functions – Digital signature
Introduction to Cyber Crime and law: Cyber Crimes, Types of
Cybercrime, Hacking, Attack vectors, Cyberspace and Criminal
Behaviour, Clarification of Terms, Traditional Problems Associated
with Computer Crime, Introduction to Incident Response,
4 Digital Forensics, Computer Language, Network Language, Realms 9
of the Cyber world, A Brief History of the Internet, Recognizing and
Defining Computer Crime, Contemporary
Crimes, Comp. as Targets, Contaminants and Destruction of Data,
Indian IT ACT 2000.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each module.  Each question carries 9 marks.

 Total of 8 Questions, each  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
carrying 3 marks which 1 question should be answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basics of network security, including different types of K2

CO1 attacks, common intrusion techniques, and various security threats,

including those posed by hackers, crackers, and cybercriminals.
Identify and explain various security services and mechanisms, K2

CO2 including OS security, authentication and access control, firewall types

and characteristics, and intrusion detection systems
Describe cryptography principles, including encryption, ciphers, K2
CO3 symmetric and public key algorithms, RSA, Diffie Hellman,
authentication, hash functions, and digital signatures.
Illustrate cybercrime and related laws, including types, attack vectors, K2
CO4
incident response, digital forensics, and the Indian IT Act 2000.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 2 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO4 2 2 - 3 2 3 - 3 - - - 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Computer Network Security Joseph M Kizza Springer Verlag 2/e, 2013
Cryptography and Network Pearson Education
2 William Stallings Asia 10/e, 2022
Security Principles and Practice
3 Network Security Essentials William Stallings Pearson Education 6/e, 2022
Fundamentals of Network
4 Eric Maiwald Tata McGraw-Hill 2/e, 2012
Security

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Anti-Hacker Tool Kit Mike Shema Mc Graw Hill 4/e, 2018
Cyber Security
2 Understanding Cyber Nina Godbole and
Wiley 2/e, 2019
Crimes, Computer Forensics Sunit Belpure
and Legal Perspectives
Mark Stamp’s Information
2 Security Principles and Deven N. Shah Wiley 4/e, 2021
Practice
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
Introduction to Cyber Security, by Dr. Jeetendra Pande, Uttarakhand Open University,
1
Haldwani:-https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/nou19_cs08/preview
Firewalls and Intrusion Detection Systems on Computer - Cryptography and Network Security
2
by Prof. D. Mukhopadhyay, Department of Computer Science and Engineering, IIT Kharagpur
Cryptography and Network Security, by Prof. Sourav Mukhopadhyay, IIT Kharagpur:-
3
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs90/preview
https://www.meity.gov.in/writereaddata/files/itbill2000.pdf
4
https://www.meity.gov.in/writereaddata/files/it_amendment_act2008%20%281%29_0.pdf
 SEMESTER S8
LOW POWER VLSI
Course Code PEECT866 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To impart knowledge on different sources of power dissipation, power minimization

techniques, switched capacitance minimization and working principle of adiabatic
logic circuits
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Physics of Power dissipation in MOSFET devices
Need for low power circuit design, MIS Structure
Deep submicron transistor design issues: Short channel effects
Channel Length Modulation , Surface scattering, Punch through, Velocity
saturation, Impact ionization, Hot electron effects, Body Effect, Narrow
1
width effect, Vth roll-off, Drain Induced Barrier Lowering, Gate Induced
9
drain leakage, Tunneling Through Gate Oxide, Subthreshold Leakage
Current,
Emerging Technologies for Low Power:
Hi-K Gate Dielectric, Lightly Doped Drain–Source, Silicon on Insulator,
Sources of power dissipation in digital ICs –
Dynamic Power Dissipation:
Short Circuit Power: Short Circuit Current of Inverter , Short circuit current
dependency on input rise and fall time, Variation of shortcircuit current
2
with load capacitance.
9
Switching power dissipation: Switching Power of CMOS Inverter,
Switching activity and its effects.
Glitching Power: Glitches and its effect on power dissipation
 Static Power Dissipation:
Sources of Leakage Power, Effects of Vdd and Vt on speed, Constraints
on Vt Reduction.
Low-Power Design Approaches-
Supply Voltage Scaling for Low Power:
Effect of Supply voltage on Delay and Power
Effect of Supply voltage on Static and Dynamic Power
Multi VDD ,Dynamic VDD, Dynamic Voltage and Frequency Scaling
3 (DVFS) Approaches. 9
Architectural Level Approaches: Pipelining and Parallel Processing
Leakage power reduction Techniques:
Effect of threshold voltage on Leakage Power
Transistor stacking, MTCMOS, VTCMOS
Power gating& Clock gating Techniques.
Circuit Design Styles for Low Power-
Non clocked circuit design style: Fully Complementary logic. NMOS and
Pseudo –NMOS logic, Differential Cascode Voltage Switch logic(DCVS)
4 Clocked design style: Basic concept, Dynamic Logic, Domino logic,
Differential Current Switch Logic. 9
Adiabatic switching – Adiabatic charging, Adiabatic amplification,
Adiabatic logic gates, Pulsed power supplies.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Describe the impact of technology scaling on power dissipation
CO1 K2
in digital ICs and various short channel effects
Discuss the different sources of power dissipation in digital
CO2 K2
ICs.
CO3 Describe the various approaches for power management in digital ICs. K2
Apply various clocked and non-clocked design styles for logic
CO4 K3
implementation
Describe the use of Adiabatic switching for power management in
CO5 K2
digital ICs.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Design of Analog CMOS
1 Behzad Razavi McGraw-Hill 2/e, 2002
Integrated Circuits
CMOS: Circuits Design, Prentice Hall India,
2 Baker, Li, Boyce, 4/e, 2015
Layout and Simulation,
Oxford University
3 Microelectronic Circuits Sedra & Smith 8/e,2020
Press

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
CMOS Analog Circuit Phillip E. Allen,
1 Oxford University Press 3/e, 2018
Design, Douglas R. Holbery
Fundamentals of Wiley student
2 Behzad Razavi 2/e, 2018
Microelectronics Edition
Analysis and Design of Meyer Gray, Hurst,
3 Wiley 6/e, 2020
Analog Integrated Circuits Lewis
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

2 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234
3 www.youtube.com/@b_razavi, www.youtube.com/@analogicdesign-iitm5234

4 Switching Circuits and Logic Design by Prof. Indranil Sengupta Lectures 47-51
 SEMESTER S8

BLOCK CHAIN

Course Code PEECT867 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To create awareness and understanding among students on the foundation of block

chain technology
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Blockchain – Definition, architecture, elements of blockchain, benefits and
limitations, types of blockchain. Consensus – definition, types, consensus in
blockchain.
1 9
Decentralization – Decentralization using blockchain, Methods of
decentralization, Routes to decentralization, Blockchain and full ecosystem
decentralization.
Consensus Algorithms, Crash fault-tolerance (CFT) algorithms – Paxos,
Raft. Byzantine fault- tolerance (BFT) algorithms – Practical Byzantine Fault
Tolerance (PBFT), Proof of work (PoW), Proof of stake (PoS), Types of
PoS.
2 Bitcoin – Definition, Cryptographic keys – Private keys, public keys, 9
addresses. Transactions – Lifecycle, coinbase transactions, transaction
validation. Blockchain – The genesis block.
Mining – Tasks of miners, mining algorithm, hash rate. Wallets – Types of
wallets.
Smart Contracts – Definition, Smart contract templates, Oracles, Types of
3 9
oracles, Deploying smart contracts. Decentralization terminology –
 Decentralized applications, Decentralized Autonomous Organizations.
Use cases of Blockchain technology – Government, Health care, Finance,
Supply chain management.
Blockchain and allied technologies – Blockchain and Cloud Computing,
Blockchain and Artificial Intelligence.
Ethereum – The Ethereum network. Components of the Ethereum ecosystem
– Keys and addresses, Accounts, Transactions and messages. The Ethereum
Virtual Machine, Blocks and blockchain.
4 The Solidity language – The layout of a Solidity source code, Structure of a 9
smart contract, variables, data types, control structures, events, inheritance,
libraries, functions, error handling.
Smart contracts Case study: Voting, Auction.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the fundamental concepts of blockchain technology. K2

CO2 Summarize the classification of consensus algorithms. K2

Explain the concepts of first decentralized cryptocurrency

CO3 K2
bitcoin.
CO4 Explain the use of smart contracts and its use cases. K2

Develop simple applications using Solidity language on Ethereum

CO5 K2
platform

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Mastering Blockchain: A deep
dive into distributed ledgers,
Third
consensus protocols, smart
1 Imran Bashir Packt Publishing, edition,
contracts, DApps,
2020.
cryptocurrencies, Ethereum,
and more,
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Solidity Programming Essentials:
A beginner's guide to build smart
First edition,
1 contracts for Ethereum and Ritesh Modi, Packt Publishing,
2018
blockchain,.

Blockchain Technology: Concepts Kumar Saurabh, Ashutosh First Edition,

2 Wiley Publications,
and Applications, Saxena, 2020
Chandramouli First edition,
Universities Press (India)
3 Blockchain Technology, , Subramanian, Asha A August
Pvt. Ltd
George, et al 2020.
Mastering Blockchain: Unlocking
the Power of Cryptocurrencies, First edition,
Lorne Lantz, Daniel O'Reilly Media
4 Smart Contracts, and 2020.
Cawrey
Decentralized Applications,

Mastering Ethereum: Building Andreas M. Antonopoulos, First edition,

5 O'Reilly Media
Smart Contracts and DApps, Gavin Wood 2018

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs44/preview
2 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/aic21_ge01/preview
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/104/106104220/
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_cs01/preview
 SEMESTER S8

ANTENNA THEORY AND WAVE PROPAGATION

Course Code PEECT868 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Course
Prerequisites (if any) ELECTROMAGNETICS Theory
Type

Course Objectives:

1. To gain a comprehensive knowledge about design and development of advanced

antennas
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Antenna theory: Radiation mechanism from an antenna, Current
Distribution on a Thin Wire Antenna, Friis Transmission Equation and
Radar Range Equation.
1 Infinitesimal dipole, small dipole, Small circular loop antenna.
Biconical antenna, Triangular sheet and Bow-tie antenna 9

TravelingWave and Broadband Antennas, Fractal Antennas

Microstrip antennas: Radiation mechanism, Rectangular Patch and

Circular Patch, Quality Factor, Bandwidth, and Efficiency, Input
Impedance, Coupling, Circular Polarisation, Substrates for microstrip
antennas
2
Antenna Measurements 9

Measurement of Antenna Range, Radiation Patterns, Gain and Directivity,

Radiation Efficiency, Impedance, Current Polarization
 Reconfigurable antennas-types- principles of frequency, polarisation and
pattern reconfigurable antennas
Metamaterial based antennas- Fundamentals of metamaterials,
3 metasurface, SRR 9
Smart Antennas: Introduction, Smart-Antenna Analogy Smart Antennas’
Benefits and drawbacks, Antenna Beamforming ,Mobile Ad hoc Networks
(MANETs)
Radio Wave Propagation
Ground wave propagation, Plane earth reflection, Space wave and surface
4 wave, Spherical earth propagation, Tropospheric waves, Ionospheric
9
propagation, Effects of earth’s magnetic field, Critical frequency, Maximum
usable Frequency, Virtual height.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyse the radiation mechanism of antennas K3
CO2 Design and measure the parameters of a microstrip antenna K4
CO3 Analyse and design advanced antennas K4

CO4 Explain the different modes and parameters of radio wave propagation K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Antenna Theory: Analysis and 4th Edition,
1 Constantine A. Balanis Wiley
Design, 2016
Microstrip Antenna Design
2 By Ramesh Garg · Artech 1/e, 2001
Handbook
Antennas and radio Wave
3 R.E.Collin McGraw Hill 2/e, 2001
propagation
Amit K. Singh, Mahesh
Metamaterials for Antenna
4 P. Abegaonkar, Shiban CRC Press 2/e, 2021
Applications
Kishen Koul ·
5 Reconfigurable antennas Suvadeep Choudhury IoP Publishing 2/e, 2023

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Microwave Engineering, David M. Pozar Wiley India 4/e, 2012.
2 Antenna and Wave Propagation Raju GSN Pearson 1/e, 2009
IEEE PRESS, Wiley
3 Modern Antenna Design, Thomas A. Milligan 2/e, 2005
Inter science
4 Antennas for all applications J D Kraus Tata McGraw hill 3/e, 2002

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/101/108101092/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101092
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TziHD1NDQ0I
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105165/
 SEMESTER S8

ANTENNA THEORY AND DESIGN

Course Code PEECT865 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 5 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) ELECTROMAGNETICS Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To gain a comprehensive knowledge about design and development of advanced

antennas
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Antenna theory: Radiation mechanism from an antenna, Current
Distribution on a Thin Wire Antenna, Friis Transmission Equation and
Radar Range Equation.
Retarded potential concept, Infinitesimal dipole, small dipole, Small circular

1 loop antenna. 11
Biconical antenna, Triangular sheet and Bow-tie antenna
Traveling Wave and Broadband Antennas, Fractal Antennas
Array antennas; Binomial array, Dolph Chebyshev array, Electronic Beam
steering principle
Microstrip antennas: Radiation mechanism, Rectangular Patch and Circular
Patch, Quality Factor, Bandwidth, and Efficiency, Input Impedance,
Coupling, Circular Polarisation, Substrates for microstrip antennas, Feeding
methods, Transmission line model

2 Broad banding of microstrip antenna using stacked elements, compact 11

circularly polarised antennas, Design of microstrip line (using software)
Antenna Measurements
Measurement of Antenna Range, Radiation Patterns, Gain and Directivity,
Radiation Efficiency, Impedance, Current Polarization
Reconfigurable antennas-types- principles of frequency, polarisation and
3 11
pattern reconfigurable antennas
 Metamaterial based antennas- Fundamentals of metamaterials, metasurface,
SRR
Smart Antennas: Introduction, Smart-Antenna Analogy Smart Antennas’
Benefits and drawbacks, Antenna Beamforming, Mobile Ad hoc Networks
(MANETs)
Radio Wave Propagation
Ground wave propagation, Plane earth reflection, Space wave and surface

4 wave, Duct propagation, Spherical earth propagation, Tropospheric waves, 11

Tropospheric scatter, Ionospheric propagation, Effects of earth’s magnetic
field, Critical frequency, Maximum usable Frequency, Virtual height.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

1. Familiarise design tools for a microstrip antenna; Design and simulate any one of the types of
antennas mentioned in the syllabus. The parameters for evaluation are Gain, directivity,
radiation efficiency, return loss, radiation patterns etc. (10 marks)
2. Using lithographic techniques and design tools, fabricate the actual prototype of the designed
antenna. (5 marks)
3. Measure the performance parameters in terms of return loss gain and radiation pattern using
the network analyser, anechoic chamber and associated equipment.(5 marks)
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyse the radiation mechanism of antennas K3
CO2 Design and measure the parameters of a microstrip antenna K4
CO3 Analyse and design advanced antennas K4

CO4 Explain the different modes and parameters of radio wave propagation K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Antenna Theory: Analysis and 4th Edition,
1 Constantine A. Balanis Wiley
Design, 2016
Microstrip Antenna Design
2 By Ramesh Garg · Artech 1/e, 2001
Handbook
Antennas and radio Wave
3 R.E. Collin McGraw Hill 2/e, 2001
propagation
Amit K. Singh, Mahesh
Metamaterials for Antenna
4 P. Abegaonkar, Shiban CRC Press 2/e, 2021
Applications
Kishen Koul ·
5 Reconfigurable antennas Suvadeep Choudhury IoP Publishing 2/e, 2023

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Microwave Engineering, David M. Pozar Wiley India 4/e, 2012.
2 Antenna and Wave Propagation Raju GSN Pearson 1/e, 2009
IEEE PRESS, Wiley
3 Modern Antenna Design, Thomas A. Milligan 2/e, 2005
Inter science
4 Antennas for all applications J D Kraus Tata McGraw hill 3/e, 2002

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/101/108101092/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101092
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TziHD1NDQ0I
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105165/
 SEMESTER S8

INTERNET OF THINGS

Course Code OEECT 831 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives:

1. This course aims to introduce IoT fundamentals.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to IoT technology: Definitions of IoT, Characteristics of IoT
devices – power, computational constraints, IoT Architectural view –
Middleware based architecture, Service oriented architecture, M2M
Communication and IoT, Typical application areas of IoT technology (case
1
studies of at least four domains) - Energy management and Smart grid, IoT
9
for Home, Cities, Environment monitoring, Agriculture, Supply chain and
customer monitoring

Components of IoT technology: Identification/Addressing - Electronic

Product Codes, RFID, ubiquitous code, IPv4, IPv6. Sensors and Actuators*.
IoT Hardware**, IoT Software – overview of Operating systems, Firmware,
2
Middle ware, Application software used in IoT. Connectivity for IoT devices
9
– characteristics.

Communication technologies for IoT : Zigbee - key features, architecture,

limitations, Bluetooth technology - bluetooth stack, piconet, scatternet,
3 9
limitations, Bluetooth Low Energy (key features, architecture, limitations),
Wifi (IEEE 802.11) technology – key features, limitations, Cellular
 technology – GSM, 3G, 4GLTE (overview), features, limitations, LoRa
technology – features, LoRaWAN architecture, 6LoWPAN – features,
protocol stack, Narrow Band (NB- IoT) – features, applications, Sigfox –
features, applications

IoT Data Management : Storage technologies for IoT hardware – Volatile,

Non-volatile, Embedded (MTP/OTP), external flash (NAND/NOR), DRAM,
eflash, UFS, eMMC (overview of technologies). Cloud and IoT, Cloud
computing – architecture, advantages of cloud computing, Software as a
4
Service (SaaS), Platform as a Service (PaaS), Infrastructure as a Service 9
(IaaS). Case study of commercial cloud computing platforms like - Microsoft
Azure IoT Suite, Google Cloud's IoT Platform, IBM Watson IoT Platform.
IoT analytics

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each module.  Each question carries 9 marks.

 Total of 8 Questions, each  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
carrying 3 marks which 1 question should be answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain in a concise manner the architecture of IoT K2
CO2 Identify various hardware and software components used in IoT K3

CO3 Discuss the various communication technologies and interfaces in IoT K2

Describe the usage of modern technologies like cloud computing for data K2
CO4
management in IoT
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Internet of Things: McGraw Hill (India)
2nd edition,
1 Architecture and Design Rajkamal Private Limited.
Principles 2022

Orient Blackswan 1st Edition,

Internet of Things (A Hands- Vijay Madisetti and
2 Private Limited - New 2015
on- Approach) Arshdeep Bahga
Delhi

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Internet of things: A survey on
IEEE Communications
1 enabling technologies, Al-Fuqaha 1/e, 2015
Surveys & Tutorials
protocols, and applications
The MIT Press
2 The Internet of Things Samuel Greengard Essential Knowledge 1/e, 2015
series Paperback
The Internet of Things:
Converging Technologies for Ovidu Vermesan and
3 River Publishers 1/e, 2013
Smart Environments and Peter Friess
Integrated Ecosystems
. Internet of Things - From
Peter Friess, Ovidiu
4 Research and Innovation to River Publishers 1/e, 2014
Vermesan
Market Deployment
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
https://youtu.be/WUYAjxnwjU4?si=s58W-NKMrEQMaJ8m
1
https://youtu.be/BXDxYh1EV2w?si=8oFtQB9vycC_c-t2
https://youtu.be/z3VEZPwl5gA?si=tNuzG_By-KBU3ks_
2 https://youtu.be/SXz0XR68dwE?si=1tVN1g9FQcGp87li
https://youtu.be/TvzgzO6xKrY?si=gYzJstW51MTNsgKj
https://youtu.be/qko-f1VDhCM?si=0tWM_OHS395ESV_w
3 https://youtu.be/d9QfVpCG00Y?si=qeHk8tPg_torr2yX
https://youtu.be/1zQ8wbBozqI?si=7vOSHMt8OT3nQINO
https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLE7VH8RC_N3bpVn-
4
e8QzOAHziEgmjQ2qE&si=rr5Fpuew5q9_Y4qg
 SEMESTER S8

SATELLITE AND RADAR COMMUNICATION

Course Code OEECT832 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To analyze operational principles of satellite communication systems

2. To apply radar techniques to detect and track targets

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Satellite orbit and orbital equations, Kepler‟s laws of planetary motion,
locating satellite in the orbit, locating satellite with respect to earth, Look
angle calculation, coverage angle and slant range, orbital perturbations,
1 satellite launching, orbital effects in communication subsystem performance.
Satellite subsystems, Attitude and orbit control system, Telemetry tracking 9
command and monitoring, power system, communication subsystem, satellite
antennas.
Satellite link design- Basic link analysis, Interference analysis, terrestrial
interference, Intermodulation interference, inter-symbol interference and rain

2 induced attenuation, uplink power control, system availability, system design

for link without frequency reuse and system design for link with frequency
9
reuse.

Basics of Radar: Introduction, Range, Radar Waveforms, Simple form of

3 Radar Equation, Radar Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies 9
and Applications, Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum Detectable
 Signal, Receiver Noise, Modified Radar Range Equation

CW and Frequency Modulated Radar: Doppler Effect, CW Radar – Block

Diagram, Applications of CW radar.
FM-CW Radar: FM-CW Radar, Range and Doppler Measurement, Block
4 Diagram and Characteristics (Approaching/ Receding Targets), FM-CW
altimeter, Multiple Frequency CW Radar. 9
MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: Introduction, Principle. MTI versus Pulse Doppler
Radar. Tracking Radar: various techniques of Tracking with Radar

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal Examination-

Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each module.  Each question carries 9 marks.

 Total of 8 Questions, each  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
carrying 3 marks which 1 question should be answered. 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Illustrate the principles of satellite communication K2
CO2 Design and analysis of satellite link K3

CO3 Illustrate Radar Fundamentals like Radar Equation and Applications. K2

CO4 Compare various types of Radars and tracking techniques K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO3 3 2 - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 - - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Timothy Pratt, Jeremy 3rd Edition,
1 Satellite Communications Wiley
Allnutt 2021
2nd Edition,
2 Introduction to Radar Systems Merrill I. Skolnik Tata McGraw-Hill
2017
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Edition,
1 Digital Satellite Communications Tri, T.Ha, McGraw-Hill Education
2017
Pearson
Satellite Communications Systems 2nd Edition,
2 Pritchard,
Engineering 2006
Education
Radar: Principles, Technology, 1st Edition,
3 Byron Edde Pearson
Applications 2004
Simon Kinsley and Shaun 1st Edition
4 Understanding Radar Systems John Wiley& Sons
Quegan 1999

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105131/
2 Same as above

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105154/

4 Same as above